You are on page 1of 516

m

0
0
rl

The 2003 Chevrolet TahoeEuburban Owner Manual
~~

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Front
Seats ............................................... 1-3 Your Driving, the Road,andYour Vehicle ..... 4-2
RearSeats ............................................... 1-8 Towing ................................................... 4-53
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-22 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-44 Service ..................................................... 5-3
Air
BagSystems ...................................... 1-68 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
RestraintSystem Check ............................ 1-80 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-12
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-50
Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Rear Axle ............................................... 5-51
DoorsandLocks ....................................... 2-8 Four-wheel Drive ..................................... 5-52
Windows ................................................. 2-15 Front Axle ............................................... 5-53
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-18 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-54
Startingand Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-21 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-60
Mirrors .................................................... 2-42 Tires ...................................................... 5-61
Onstar@System ...................................... 2-51 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-88
HomeLink@Transmitter ............................. 2-53 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-96
StorageAreas ......................................... 2-57 Electrical System ...................................... 5-97
Sunroof .................................................. 2-60 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-106
Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-61 NormalMaintenanceReplacement Parts .... 5-109
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-20 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2
WarningLights,Gagesand Indicators ......... 3-35
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Driver Information Center(DIC) .................. 3-52
lnex .................................................................. 1
AudioSystem(s) ....................................... 3-70

Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, How to Use This Manual
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the name
TAHOE and the name SUBURBAN are registered Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
trademarks of General Motors Corporation. to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
This manual includes the latest information at the time it you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first that pictures and words work together to explain things.
sold in Canada, substitute the name ”General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual. Index
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it. in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.

Litho in U.S.A. @Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/24/02
Part No. C2316 A First Edition All Rights Reserved

ii

Safety Warnings and Symbols You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. this book. This safety
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about symbol means “Don’t,’’
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
warning.

I
1
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other
people. I
I
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.

...
II’

Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices: Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
Notice: These mean there is something that could are shown along with the text describing the operation
damage your vehicle. or information relating to a specific component, control,
A notice will tell you about something that can damage message, gage or indicator.
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the component, gage or indicator reference the following
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the topics in the Index:
damage.
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in Features and Controls in Section 2
different words. Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
Climate Controls in Section 3
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio Systems in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv

These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:

CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A LATCH BOTH LAP AND
SHOULDER BELTS TO

DO
PROTECT
NOT
OCCUPANT
TWISTSAFETY
BELT WHEN ATTACHING
48:@
*
LIGHTING - ENGINE
COOLANT cc
TEMP
F E
ACCESS
l.fd
fi
W
PROTECT TURN
SIGNALS BATTERY ENGINE
EYES BY
CHARGING COOLANT
SHIELDING
SYSTEM FAN

CAUSTIC
BATTERY
MOVE SEAT
\v/
sz DO NOT INSTALL LAMPS Pf
A
FULLY A REAR-FACING FUEL

a
4CID COULD CHILD RESTRAINT
REARWARD+
CAUSE

GI
SECURE IN THIS SEATING
BURNS POSITION
CHILD SEAT
FLASHER COOLANT OWNER'S
MANUAL
AVO ID PULL BELT
DO NOT INSTALLA
SPARKS OR
FORWARD-FACING
FLAMES COMPLETELY
CHILD RESTRAINT ENGINE OIL
rHEN SECURE SERVICE
IN THIS SEATING PRESSUREw 4
CHILD SEAT
SPARK OR POSITION

COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
L
WINDOW l h DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK LAMPS #0 FOG ANTI-LOCK (@)
BRAKES
MANUAL

Model Reference
This manual covers these models:

Suburban

Tahoe

vi

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Front
Seats ............. ............ .......1-3 Child Restraints ............................................. 1-44
ManualSeats ........... ............................. -1-3 Older Children .............................................. 1-44
Power Seats ................................................. -1-4 Infants and Young Children ............................ 1-46
Power Lumbar ............................................... 1-4 Child Restraint Systems ................................. 1-49
Heated Seats ................................................. 1-5 Where to Put the Restraint ............................. 1-52
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-5 Top Strap .................................................... 1-53
Head Restraints ............................................. 1-7 Top Strap Anchor Location ............................. 1-54
Rear Seats ...................................................... -1-8 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Rear Seat Operation ....................................... 1-8 Children (LATCH System) ........................... 1-56
60/40 Split Bench Seat ................................... 1-8 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
50/50 Split Bench Seat .................................. 1-10 LATCH System ......................................... 1-59
Bench Seat .................................................. 1-14 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Bucket Seats ............................................... 1-19 Seat Position ........................................... -1-59
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Safety Belts ................................................... 1-22 Seat Position ............................................ 1-61
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-22 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-26 Seat Position ............................................ 1-63
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-27 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Driver Position .............................................. 1-28 Seat Position ............................................ 1-64
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-35
Right Front Passenger Position ....................... 1-36 Air Bag Systems ............................................ 1-68
Center Passenger Position ............................. 1-36 Where Are the Air Bags? ............................... 1-70
Rear Seat Passengers .................................. 1-38 When Should an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-72
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ..................... 1-74
and Small Adults ....................................... 1-41 How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ..................... 1-74
Safety Belt Extender ............................. 1-43

1-1

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...1-74 Restraint System Check .................................. 1.80
Passenger Sensing System ............................ 1.76 Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1.80
Servicing Your Air Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Bag-Equipped Vehicle ................................ 1.79 Crash ............................................ ......1-81
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle .................................................... 1.79

1-2

Front Seats
Manual Seats

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicleis not moving.
If your vehicle has a manual bucket or a split bench
seat, you can adjust it with this lever located at the front
of the seat.
Lift the lever to unlock the seat. Using your body, slide
the seat to where you want it and release the lever.
Try to move the seat with your body to make sure the
seat is locked into place.

1-3

Xr .. Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole horizontal control forward or rearward. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-5. Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by @ : . these controls located on the outboard sides of the seats.Power Seats Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by raising or lowering the rear edge of the horizontal control. To increase or decrease support. you can use the vertical control to adjust the angle of the seatback. Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support. press and hold the front or rear of the control. e 4 raising or lowering the forward edge of the horizontal control. . If your vehicle has power reclining seats. Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward by moving the control toward the rear or the front of the vehicle. =g .. Moving the whole horizontal control up or down raises or lowers the entire seat cushion.. 1-4 . the four-way control is located on the If your vehicle has a power seat. Power Lumbar If your vehicle has this feature. you can adjust it with outboard side of the seat.

press the horizontal button. lever to lock the seatback where you want it. The indicator light will glow to indicate the level of heat selected. you will need to press the heated seat button again. Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high. seatback for more lateral support. press the vertical button with the heated seatback symbol. medium. To heat only the seatback. and low. If you still want to use the heated front seatback reaches the desired level of support. Release the is being heated. lift the manual lever button will glow to designate thatonly the seatback located on the outboard side of the seat. The button used to control the passenger’s heated seat is located on the passenger’s door panel. press and hold the top or bottom of The heated front seats will be canceled after the ignition the control. Lift the lever again without pushing on the seatback and the seatback will go to an upright position. An indicator light on the To adjust the front seatback. To increase or decrease support.You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower The engine must be running for them to operate. To heat the entire seat. Heated Seats Reclining Seatbacks If your vehicle has this feature. 1-5 . the button used to control the driver’s heated seat is located on the driver’s door panel. Let go of the control when the lower is turned off. seat feature after you restart your vehicle.

not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would bethere.Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this.If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner. receiving neck or other injuries. Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. you could go into it. Even if you buckle up. In a crash. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion. 1 -6 . The lap belt can’t doits job either. But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. have the seatback upright. see Power Seats on page 1-4 for further information on how to operate the reclining seatback feature.

The rear seat head restraints in your vehicle may be adjustable. They work the same as the front seat head restraints. I 1-7 .Head Restraints Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. except they do not tilt forward and rearward. On some models the head restraints tilt forward and rearward also. To raise the head restraint pull up on the head restraint.

press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is SuburbanNukon XL: The second row rear seat of locked.~e TahoeNukon: The rear seat may have a 60/40 split forward in a sudden stop or crash. SuburbanNukon XL models may have a60/40 split seat. Always space.. Pull the seat forward until it stops. _. 60/40Split Bench Seat I.. That could seat which may be folded down to give you more cargo cause injury to the person sitting there. Tilt the seatback toward the front of the vehicle by Rear Seat Operation pulling the top of the seat forward.le seatb--k isn’t lock.. ... SuburbanNukon XL: The passenger’s side of the second row 60/40 or rear bucket seats has an easy entry feature. it caw.Rear Seats To operate the easy entry seat turn the release lever. When you do the seat bottom will release. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked in place. if your vehicle has one. 1-8 . Entering or Exiting the Third Be sure to return the seat to the passenger position Row Seats when finished. This makes it easy to get in and out of the third seat. Either side of the rear seat my be folded down to provide more cargo space. located on the back of the seat upward..

On the be equipped with rearward folding head restraints. it could mlude forward in a sudden stop or crash. the the seatback is being folded down. pull the Make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat seatback forward and fold the seatback down until it is and that the head restraints are completely lowered. pull up on the strap loop at the rear of the seat cushion. Then. pull the seat cushion up and fold it forward.Folding the Seatbacks To fold. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. flat. the head restraint lever at the base of the seat must be turned rearward will automatically fold rearward to allow a flat load floor to release the seatback. After folding the seat cushion fully forward. 1-9 . If the seatbacn m ’ t locked. for cargo or entry to the third row seat (if equipped). try moving the seat forward On TahoeNukon models the rear seatbacks may and/or bring the front seatback more upright. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with the cushion. When passenger side of the SuburbanNukon XL models.

1-10 . Then fold the panels back to cover the rear seat footwell area. 3. Lift the seatback up and push rearward all the way. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position. 4. Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat cushion to make sure the seat is securely in place. 50/50Split Bench Seat If your vehicle has a 50/50 split bench. 2. To return the seat to the passenger position on a SuburbanNukon XL do the following: 1 . Lift the floor load panels and latch them into the seatback. Make sure that the buckles on the driver's side seatback are accessible to the outboard and center occupant and are not under the seat cushions. On TahoeNukon models make sure the head restraints are returned to the upright position. seatback by pushing forward on the latch. the seatback(s) can be folded and the entire seat(s) tilted or removed To create a load floor release the panels from the from the vehicles.

To do this. To fold the seatbacks do the following: Pull up on the release lever. Once the third seatback has been folded down. That could cause injury to the person sittingthere. it could move If the seatback isn’t locked. Push forward on the seatback to make sure it is locked I into position. Enter the rear cargo area of the vehicle. That could cause injury the seatback until the seatback locks into the upright to people and damageto your vehicle. the entire seat can be tilted forward to create a flat load floor. locked. and push the seatback I forward. If the support rod isn’t properly engaged. . the To return the seat to the passenger position. Always cause injury to the person sitting there.That could forward in a sudden stop or crash.Folding the Seatbacks Tilting the 50/50 Split Bench Seat ~ If the seatback isn’t locked. it c-Ad move forward in a sudden stop or crash. Always position. do the following: 1. be sure the support rod is properly engaged when the third row seatis folded forward. labeled 1. pull up folded third row seat could come loosein a on the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on sudden stop or crash. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is press rearward on the seatbackto be sureit is locked. located on the rear of the seatback.

5. Lower the seat to the floor and let the seat drop into place. 1. 2. Push forward on the seat and release the support seatback is folded. Tilt the seat fully forward and secure it in place Removing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat using the support rod located on the underside of the seat on the passenger’s side. Pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the in place. Fold the seatback position only when necessary for additional forward onto the seai cargo space. Push and pull on the seat. the back can be folded upright. 1-12 . 3. 2. Return the seatback to the upright position by by pulling up on the lever located under the pulling up on the release lever labeled 1 before carrying handle at the rear of the seat labeled 2. following: The seat cannot be removed unless the 1. Open the rear doors and enter the rear of the 6. You will not 6. rod is holding it firmly in place. Lift the rear of the seat up. Make sure the head restraints have been lowered 4. off the floor. unlatch the seat from the floor 5. 3. With the seat folded. Secure the support rod in its stored position on the underside of the seat. do the following: rod pin is fully engaged in the lock. Make sure the To remove the 50/50 split bench seat. cushion by using To return the seat to the seating position do the the lever labeled 1. Use the seat in this 2. Make sure the support vehicle. Lift up on the carrying handle to make sure the seat completely. lock rod. is locked in place. 4. seatback is folded down.

Squeeze the release lever. roll the seat move around in a collision or sudden stop. while pulling the seat out. Be sure to lock theseat into place properly when installing it. Always press rearward on the seatbackto be sure it is locked. out of the vehicle. located in the lower middle to unlatch the seat from the floor. People in the vehicle could be injured. To unlatch the seat Replacing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat from the floor. 3. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. While holding the rear of the seat up. 4. ’ t locked. forward in a sudden stop or crash. A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can 5. 1-13 . pull up on the release lever labeled 2. located at the rear of the seat. and lift the rear of the seat up off the If the seatback L . it could move floor.

or twisted won’t provide the protection needed in a crash. If the seatback isn’t locked. The front latches locked. try tilting the rear of the seats upwards. Bench Seat If your vehicle has a full bench seat. If the latches do not lock. Once the latches are engaged. slide the front press rearward on the seatback tobe sure it is wheels into the slots on the floor. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. 3. While holding the rear of the seat up. always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached. Always 1. should lock into place. 2. 1-14 .The person FolAingthe Seatback wearing the belt could be seriously injured. and are not twisted.it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. let the seat drop into place. After raising the rear seatback. do the following: cause injury to the person sitting there. The seatback cannot be raised to the upright position unless the seat is secured to the floor. properly attached. That could To reinstall the 50/50 split bench. not vehicle. the seatback can be folded and the seat can be tilted or removed from the A safety belt that is improperly routed. Release the lever labeled 1 to return the seat to its upright position.

the entire seat can be tilted forward to create a flat load floor. Enter the rear cargo area of the vehicle. it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. labeled 1. 1-15 . pull up on the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the If the support rod isn’t properly engaged. Pull up on the release lever. 2. That could cause injury to the personsitting there. do the following: Tilting the Bench Seat 1.ck isn’t lockeb. Always into place. Once the third seatback has been folded down. be sure the support rod is properly engaged when the third row seatis folded forward. sudden stop or crash. If the seat.. That could cause injury Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked to people and damageto your vehicle. the seatback until the seatback locks into the upright folded third row seat could come loosein a position. To return the seat to an upright position. do the following: 1.To fold the seatback on the bench seat. To do this. located on the rear of the seatback and push the seatback forward. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

the floor by pulling To return the seat to the seating position do the up on the lever located following: under the carrying 1. 4. Push and pull on the seat. off the floor. Make sure the rod pin is fully engaged in the lock. Make sure the support completely. position only when necessary for additional unlatch the seat from cargo space. Secure the support rod in its stored position on the underside of the seat. 5. Lower the seat to the floor and let the seat drop into place. You will not pulling up on the release lever labeled 1 before be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the the back can be folded upright.2. Make sure the head restraints have been lowered 6. using the support rod located on the underside of the seat on the passenger’s side. Use the seat in this 3. seatback is folded down. 6. the seat labeled 2. rod is holding it firmly in place. 1-16 . 3. Lift up on the carrying handle to make sure the seat is locked in place. Return the seatback to the upright position by 4. Push forward on the seat and release the support handle at the rear of lock rod. Tilt the seat fully forward and secure it in place in place. Lift the rear of the seat up. With the seat folded. Pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked 5. 2.

Removing the Bench Seat 3. Open the rear doors and enter the rear of the at the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the release lever. 4. located 1. The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback is folded. pull up To remove the full bench seat. While holding the rear of the seat up. 5. seat. 1-17 . do the following: on the release lever labeled 2. To unlatch the seat from the floor. cushion by using the lever labeled 1. and l i f t the rear of 2 Fold the seatback the seat up off the forward onto the seat floor. located in the lower middle to unlatch the seat from the floor while pulling the seat out. roll the seat out of the vehicle.

let the seat drop to lock the seat into place properly when into place. Once the latches are engaged. While holding the rear of the seat up.. 1. Release the lever labeled 1 to return installing it. always check press rearward on the seatbackto be sureit is to be sure that the safety beltsare properly locked. _Itthat is improperly luted. 1-18 . The person forward in a sudden stop or crash.. To reinstall the full bench seat. The front latches Aa. and are not twisted. routed and attached. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. the seat to its upright position. Always After raising therear seatback. wheels into the slots on the floor. try tilting the rear of the seats upwards.Replacing the Bench Seat A safe-. Be sure 2.- properly attached.>lace properly can should lock into place. move around in a collision or sudden stop. . do the following: A CAUTION: . not . If the latches do not lock. The seatback cannot be raised to the upright position unless the seat is secured to the floor. People in the vehicle could be injured. cause injury to the person sitting there. I 3. slide the front .t that isn’t locked int. That could wearing the belt could be seriously injured. or twisted won’t provide the If the seatback isn’t locket t could move protection needed in a crash.

the seatback will go to an upright the head restraints need to be removed in order to position. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you forward to give you more cargo space. That could On the SuburbanNukon XL models with bucket seats.. want it. the seatbacks can be reclined and the seats can be folded to give you more cargo room. seatback. Pull forward the lever located at the base of the seat. Press in the button on the side of the head restraint guide cap and lift up on the head restraint. If you pull the lever without pushing on the On SuburbanNukon XL models with rear bucket seats. fold the rear seats. -:could n.ve forward in a sudden stop or crash. 1-19 . To do this follow these directions: 1.Bucket Seats Folding the Seatbacks If your vehicle has bucket seats. 2. To adjust the seatback press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is do the following: 1. Reclining the Seatbacks __-he seatbac-'t locked. cause injury to the person sitting there. Lift the head restraints up until they stop. Always the seatbacks can be reclined. The seatbacks on the bucket seats may be folded 2. Do the same for the other cap. 3.

. Then fold it forward..The head restraint can be removed and stored in the 2. . If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with the cushion. release lever up and pull the seatback To fold the seatbacks on the bucket seats.. of the seat cushion " " and pull the seat cushion up. do the forward.". try moving the front seat forward and/or bringing the front seatback more upright.. Then fold it following: until it is flat. 1-20 . 1. Pull the seatback space provided in the folded up seat cushion... Pull up on the strap loop located at the rear - .

covered by the load floor panel. If you have removed the head restraints to fold the rear bucket seat. Then fold the panels back to cover the rear seat do the following: footwell area. 2. 1-21 .Once the seatbacks are folded down. Release the panels from the seatbacks by pushing footwell area will be exposed and will have to be forward on the latches.the rear seat 1. To create a load floor. be sure to reinstall them on the seatback after it has been returned to the normal seating position.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a ~ seat and using a safety belt properly. In a belts properly. Always fasten your safety belt. If you arein a crash and you’re not wearing a safetybelt.Safety Belts Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone It is extremely da -erous to ride in a cargo This part of the manual tells you how to use safety area. Don’t let anyone ride where he orshe can’t wear a safety belt properly.Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. you might notbe. You can be seriously injured or killed. if you are buckled up. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected fromit. your injuries can be much worse. likely to be seriously injured or killed. people riding in these areas are more not do with safety belts. 1-22 .In the same crash. inside or outside of a vehicle. and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. It also tells you some things you should collision.

Aftermorethan 30 yearsof safety belts in vehicles. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels. In most crashes buckling up does matter. Your vehicle has a light WhySafety Belts Work that comes on as a reminder to buckle UP. In most states and in all Canadian provinces. people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. a person wouldn’t survive. you go as fast as Safety Belt Reminder it goes.. Here’s why: They work. In many of them. and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up. the I facts are clear.. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. 1-23 . You never know if you’ll be in a crash. you don’t know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild. the law says to wear safety belts. See When you ride in or on anything. a lot! Take the simplest vehicle. But most crashes are in between. If you do have a crash. Light on page 3-37.

.

The person keeps going until stopped by something... it could be the windshield. a real vehicle. In or the instrument panel. 1-25 ...

You stop over more distance. That’s true not only in frontal collisions. but especially in side and other collisions. safety belts . is much greater if you are belted. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags. so they work with You get more time to stop. But they are With safety belts. safety belts. why should I have to wear safety belts? or the safety belts! A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. That’s why system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts make such good sense. so you can unbuckle and get out.whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? A: You could be . And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident. you slow down as the vehicle does. you still have to buckle up to get the most protection.not instead of them. Every air bag and your strongest bones take the forces. even if you’re upside down. But you can unbuckle a safety belt. Q: If my vehicle has air bags. supplemental systems only. 1-26 .

vehicle has. see Older Children on page 1-44 control. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph First. And there are different driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your rules for smaller children and babies. but if you’re in an accident . why should I wear safety belts? This part is only for people of adult size. such as bad drivers. and I never drive far from How to Wear Safety Belts Properly home. Safety belts are for everyone. A: You may be an excellent driver.you and Be aware that there are special things to know about your passengers can be hurt. If a child will be riding in your vehicle. Being a good safety belts and chiidren. or Infants and Young Children on page 1-46. 1-27 .Q: If I’m a good driver. Follow Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of those rules for everyone’s protection. you’ll want to know which restraint systems your (65 km/h). We’ll start with the driver position.even one that isn’t your fault . home.

If the belt isn’t long enough. let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. If this happens.Driver Position 3. 4. 1. Belt Extender on page 1-43. Here’s how to wear it across you more slowly. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt Lap-Shoulder Belt across you very quickly. 1-28 . This part describes the driver’s restraint system. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. see “Seats” in the Index. Then pull the belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Don’t let it get twisted. see Safety how. To see secure. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Close and lock the door. properly.

pull down on the buckle The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. In a crash.5. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. To make the lap part tight. the hips. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. the belt would apply force at your abdomen. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. just touching the thighs. this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. 1-29 . If you slid under it. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.

In a crash. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. which could increase injury. A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won't give nearly as much protection this way. you would move forward too much. 1-30 .Q: What's wrong with this? You c.be seriouslyhurt if yt ' st Jlder belt is too loose.

This could cause serious internal injuries.Q: What’s wrong with this? I You canbe s e _lus!yi Ired if ~ belt is buckled in the wrong place likethis. In a crash. not at the pelvic bones. A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-31 .The belt forces would bethere. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. the belt would go up over your abdomen.

youcan slide under the belt.Q: What’s wrong with this? 1 1 You ca.. Je ser-----g ir -. The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen. 1 A: The belt is over an armrest. not at the pelvic bones. and i that could cause serious or fatal injuries. 1-32 . The belt would be much too high.-- red if your belt goes over an armrest like this. In a crash. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

1 1 A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. your body would move too far forward. Also. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury.Q: What's wrong with this? You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under yourarm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. the belt would apply too much force to the ribs. In a crash. 1-33 . which aren't as strong as shoulder ' bones.

A: The belt is twisted across the body. ~ ~ ~ d bya~tv . 1-34 . belt.~ ~ In a crash. If a belt is twisted. or ask your dealer to fix it. you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. I . make it straight so it can work properly.Q: What’s wrong with this? Youcan be seriousl.

you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible. If you slam the door on it. To unlatch the belt. including pregnant women. Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone. be sure the belt is out of the way. The belt should go back out of the way. Like all occupants. throughout the pregnancy. below the rounding. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt. Before you close the door. they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. 1-35 . just push the button on the buckle.

it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats. When a safety belt is worn properly. just let the belt go back all the way and start again. For pregnant women. To learn how to wear this belt see “Lap-Shoulder Belt” under RearSeat Passengers on page 1-38. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way. 1-36 . the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt-except for one thing. you will engage the child restraint locking feature which may turn off the passenger’s frontal air bag. see Driver Position on page 1-28. Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly.The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the Center Passenger Position mother. someone can sit in the center positions. as for anyone. When you sit in the center seating position in the second row you have a lap-shoulder belt which is similar to the rear outside seating positions. If this happens unintentionally.

tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. To make the belt longer. A lap safety belt does not have a retractor.Lap Belt When you sit in a center seating position other than in the second row you have a lap belt. 1-37 .

Rear Seat Passengers Lap-Shoulder Belt The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle belts. up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Here’s how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1. 1-38 . And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Don’t let it get twisted.

To make the lap part tight. it will lock. 3. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If it does.2. see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-43. pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. If the belt is not long enough. let it go back all the way and start again. When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way. 1-39 . Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. In a crash. you would move forward too much. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. In a crash. just touching the thighs. I You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. just push the button on the buckle. The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash. which could increase injury. To unlatch the belt. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. And you'd be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 1-40 . The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. the belt would apply force at your abdomen.

There is one guide available for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. If it doesn’t. When installed on a shoulder belt.Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Your vehicle may have this feature already. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt: 1. For the second row. you can get it from any GM dealer. 1-41 . Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults. remove the guide from its storage clip on the trim panel near the side of the seatback. For the third row. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two clip on the side of the seatback edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. remove the guide from its storage 2. the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head.

.

position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-38. The extender will be just for you. Make sure you remove the comfort guide from the belt before you fold a rear seat down or use an easy-entry seat. you should use it. so the extender will be long enough for you. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you. and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it. 1-43 . your dealer will order you an extender. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. take the heaviest coat you will wear. and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. To remove and store the comfort guides. just attach it to the regular safety belt. It’s free. if your vehicle has one. Third Row Seat 4. But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten. squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides. When you go in to order it. Don’t let someone else use it. Buckle.

In a crash. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. an older child should wear a Older Children lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up. Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear seat. which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips. If you have the choice. a child should sit in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.Child Restraints Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: If possible. Older children need to use safety belts properly. It should never be worn over the abdomen. Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. or can be thrown out of the vehicle. just touching the top of the thighs. 1-44 .

move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either case. Never do this. If the child is sitting in the second row center position. Here two children are wearing the same belt. the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck. but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? L4:ff the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position. move the child toward the center of the vehicle. if your vehicle has one. Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt. See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults on page 1-41. you might want to place the child a seat that has a lap belt. In a crash. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder. 1-45 .A belt must be used by only one person at a time. so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide.

for everyone. but the shoulder part is Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles. the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Instead. The belt’s force would thenbe applied right on the child’sabdomen. they need to use a child restraint. behind the child. this way. Wherever the child sits. Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need. unless there is no other choice. the law in every state in the United States and in Never do this. in a crash the child might slide under the belt. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. If the child wears the beltin they should have the protection provided by appropriate CAUTION: (Continued) restraints. to use safety restraints. In fact. 1-46 . just touching the child’s thighs. lap-shoulder belt. every Canadian province says children up to some age Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a must be restrained while in a vehicle. Young children should not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone.

Forexan . People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. (110 kg) force on a person's arms.A baby doesn't weigh -- much until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to CAUTION: (Continued) 1-47 .5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. A baby should be securedin an appropriate restraint. (5. a 12-lb. in z rashat c y 2 nph (40 km/h).~e. holL .t.

be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. there are many different models available. If it is. In addition. This restraints? is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck A: Add-on child restraints. Selection of a particular restraint should take an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the into consideration not only the child’s weight. them. Newborn infants need complete support. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Air bags plus lap-shoulder The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come belts offer outstanding protection for adults with the restraint state the weight and height and older children. I For most basic types of child restraints. label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle any air bag when it inflates can be seriously safety standards. In a crash. so the crash forces can be and age but also whether or not the restraint will distributed across the strongest partof an be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will infant’s body. the back and shoulders. but not for young children limitations for a particular child restraint. which are purchased by the is weak and its head weighs so much vehicle’s owner. are available in four basic types. compared with the rest of its body. and infants. injured or killed. or very close to. height restraint. Q: What are the different types of add-on child including support for thehead and neck. When purchasing a child restraint. the restraint will have a Children who are up against. always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt there are many kinds of restraints available for system nor its air bag system is designed for children with special needs. 1-48 . Infants be used.

a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle. for whom the safety belts are designed. it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints. Child Restraint Systems The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child. is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. A young child’s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones. the belt would apply force on a bodyarea that’s unprotected by any bony structure. 1-49 . as it should. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle. An infant car bed (A). Instead. In a crash.

1-50 . in a crash. / A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for seating surface against the back of the infant. with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. The the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes harness system holds the infant in place and.

1-51 . rests low against the child’s body. the three-point harness. A buiit-in chiid restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle. has straps that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to and buckle together at the crotch. or position children. The five-point improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.or armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a wide. An add-on child restraint system is a portable one. A T-shaped shield has A booster seat can also help a child to see out the shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which window. seat. add-on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle. Q: How do child restraints work? A: A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain. which is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. Some harness system has two shoulder straps. A shelf. To help reduce the chance of injury. place of hip straps. A shield may take the some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. and the add-on child restraint’s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint. shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side. two booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner. the child also has to be secured within the restraint. For many years. The vehicle’s belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the vehicle. One system. and hip straps and a crotch strap.

Where to Put the Restraint Even thoughthe Passenger Sensing Systemis Accident statistics show that chldren are safer if they designed to turnoff the passenger’s frontal air are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.When choosing a child restraint. a child riding in a some unusual circumstance. These restraints use the belt system in passenger’s air bag inflates. bag if the system detects a rear-facing child General Motors. or both. Never put a child in a rear-facing child recommends that rear-facing child restraints be restraint in the right front passenger seat unless secured i n the rear seat wheneverpossible. air Be sure the air injury. but the child also has to be secured back of the rear-facing child restraint would be within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal very close to the inflating bag. When securing an add-on child restraint. General Motors therefore booster seat. and to this manual. If it is. no system is fail-safe. it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. obtain a the right front seat. even though it is forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a turned off. Here’s why: 1-52 . This is because the your vehicle. You may A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a seriously injured or killed if the right front booklet. The child restraint instructions are If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in important. Then follow the instructions for the restraint. Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the air bag is off. passenger seat as far backas it will go. be on the restraint itself or in a booklet. recommends that child restraint. your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and the even if the air bagis off. refer bag is off before using a rear-facing child to the instructions that come with the restraint which may restraint i n the right frontseat position. so if they are not available. and no one can restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant guarantee thatan air bag will not deploy under riding in a rear-facing infant seat. It is better to secure the child restraint rearin a seat. therefore. passenger air bag status indicator shows off. be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. always move the front replacement copy from the manufacturer. or both.

If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and If the child restraint does not have a top strap. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored. be sure to secure the child restraint properly. See Passenger Sensing System is available. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. In the United States. on page 1-76 and Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1-64 for more on this including important safety information. If your child restraint has a top strap. anchored. Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap. Be sureto properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle. in kit form. or “top tether”. It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision. For it to work. some child restraints also have a top strap. one can you need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in be obtained. the passengers frontal Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit air bag must be off. the right front passenger’s seat. a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or suddenstop and injure people in the vehicle. the law requires that forward-facing child be anchored. don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored restraints have a top strap.even when nochild is init. it should be anchored. for many child restraints. 1-53 . Wherever you install it. Others require the top strap always to be anchored. and that the strap be properly. If yours requires that the top strap In Canada.

you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions say. SuburbanNukon XL Models without Rear Seats Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Don’t use a child restraint with a top strap in the front seat because there’s no place to anchor the top strap. If you have an adjustable head restraint. Top Strap Anchor Location TahoelSuburbanNukonNukon XL models without rear seats: Top strap anchor loops are located at the bottom rear of the front seat cushion for the right front passenger’s position. Once you have the top strap anchored.Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points. route the top strap under it. you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself. TahoelSuburbanNukonNukon XL models with rear seats: A child restraint with a top strap should only be used in the second or third row. 1-54 . Once you have the top strap anchored. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.

Bucket front passenger’s position. and for the center seating position in the third row. 1-55 . Don’t use a child restraint with a top strap in the right SuburbanNukonXL Second Row Seat. Third Row Bench Seat TahoeNukon models: A child restraint with a top strap should only be used in the second or third row. because there’s no place to Seats Similar anchor the top strap.An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row.

To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child restraint system. 1-56 . you’ll find anchors (A) in the second row seats. If it does.An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for the center seating position in the third row. each seating position with the LATCH system will have a visible metal anchorage point in the seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion. Third Row 50/50 Split Bench Seat Lower Anchorages andTop Tethers for Children (LATCH System) Your vehicle may have the LATCH system. where the seatback meets the seat cushion.

you need either a forward-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C). or a rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B). 1-57 . as shown here.In order to use the system.

Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed using the anchorage points. With this system. If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to its anchorage points. 1-58 . the restraint won’tbe able to protect a child sittingthere. use the LATCH system instead of the vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint. the child could be seriously injured or killed. or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint. In a crash. See “Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System’’ or “Securing 1 a Child Restraint in a Center Rear Seat Position’’ in the Index for information on how to secure a child restraint in your vehicle.

The child restraint instructions will show you how. simply unhook the top strap from the top tether anchor and thendisconnect the If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH anchor points. where the bottom of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion. To remove the child restraint. 4. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.Securing a Child Restraint Designed Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear for the LATCH System Outside Seat Position 1. attach the top strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on page 1-53 if the child restraint has one. You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. If the child restraint is forward-facing. 3. Tighten the top strap according to the child restraint instructions. Put the child restraint on the seat. 1-59 . See Top Strap on page 1-53. 1. 2. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. system see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-56. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Find the anchors for the seating position you want to use. Put the restraint on the seat. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle. 5.

The child restraint instructions will show you how. and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. 1-60 . Buckle the belt. 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.2. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 3. Pick up the latch plate.

feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-56. To remove the child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint. To tighten the belt. you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. system. Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear Seat Position 5. Push and pull the child restraint in different If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH directions to be sure it is secure. 6. 1-61 .

For instructions on how to secure a child restraint using a lap-shoulder belt see Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-59. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 2. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt. See Top Strap on page 1-53 if the child restraint has one. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.Second Row The center seat position in the second row has a lap-shoulder belt which works the same way as the safety belt in the rear outside seat positions. Put the restraint on the seat. 3. 1. 1-62 . Third Row The center seat position in the third row has a lap belt.

To remove the child restraint. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. 6. just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. Buckle the belt. Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position 4. 1-63 . 5. Don’t use child restraints in this position. To tighten the belt. you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. The restraints won’t work properly. It will be ready to work for an adult or iarger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position A child ~~ arear-facing d d restr It can ! seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. the passenger’s air bag must be off. _I If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and you need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat. Unless your vehicle has the passenger important safety information. sensing system. A rear page 3-38for more information on this including seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. 1-64 . See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-76 and Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator on Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat unless the air bag isoff. Thisis because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag.

The child restraint instructions will show you how. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as ~ A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be the instructions say. make sure the frontal air bag is off. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system ~ Even though the passenger sensing system is and you are using a rear-facing child restraint in this ~ designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal air seat. See Power Seats i rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat on page 1-4 or Manual Seats on page 1-3. ~ ~ would be very close to the inflating airbag. restraints be secured in the rear seat whenever possible. General Motors stay lit when you turn the ignition to RUN or therefore recommends that rear-facing child START. See ~ bag if the system detects a rear-facing child Passenger Sensing System on page 1-76. even if the air bag is off. Put the restraint on the seat. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. i restraint. even indicator on the inside rearview mirror will light and though it is turned off. 2. and no one When the passenger sensing system has turned off can guarantee that an air bag will not deploy the right front passenger’s frontal air bag. and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. This is because air bag. 1-65 . the off under some unusual circumstance. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger ~ passenger’s air bag inflates. 3. i position. always move the seat as far back as it will ~ the back of the rear facing child restraint go before securing a forward-facing child restraint. See Top Strap on page 1-53 if the child restraint has one. You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. . Pick up the latch plate. no system is fail-safe. seriously injured or killed if the right front 1. Be if you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint sure the air bag isoff before using a in the right front seat position.

1-66 .4. Buckle the belt. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock. Make sure the release button is 5. safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

air bag still doesn’t turn off. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an 6. You should not be able to pull more of the belt out of the retractor once the lock has been set. 1-67 . If the air bag has been turned off. install the infant restraint in a rear seat position of the vehicle and have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. the off indicator will light and stay lit when the key is turned to RUN or START. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and you’re using a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. If the on indicator is lit. turn the vehicle off. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. feed the shoulder belt back into adult or larger child passenger. If this ever happens. if the. the passenger’s frontal air bag has not been turned off. After restarting the vehicle. the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. To tighten the belt. unbuckle the safety belt and perform the steps to install the rear-facing restraint again. 8. just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. To remove the child restraint. 7. check to be sure the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is off before you begin to drive.

Side impact air bags are available for the driver and right front passenger. 1-68 . Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.a frontal air bag for the driver and another frontal air bag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle has air bags . passenger’s seatback closest to the door. If your vehicle has a side impactair bag for the driver. But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations.Air Bag Systems If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the right front passenger. the words AIR BAG will appear onthe air bag covering on the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door. Your vehicle may also have a side impact air bag. the words AIR BAG will appear on the This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag air bag covering on the side of the right front systems.

faster than the blink eye. Always wear your safety belt. They aren’t designed to inflateat all in Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate rollover. in position for air bag inflation before and during a crash. Frontal air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to deploy only in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate in frontal.The driver shouldsit to inflate onlyin front passenger are designed as far back as possible while still maintaining moderate to severe crashes where something control of the vehicle. Front occupants should CAUTION: (Continued) not lean on or sleep against the door. of an many side crashes. in or with great force. Safety belts help keep you air bags have provided in the past. The side impact air bags for the driver and right even with frontal air bags.even if Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety you have air bags. if you aren’t wearing your safety belt. hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Wearing your safety belt belt properly . it could protection in frontal crashes than more forceful seriously injure you. And. frontal air bags may provide less would be if you were leaning forward. rear or low-speed frontal crashes.whether or not there’san air during a crash helps reduce your chance of bag for that person. .Here are the most important things to know about the air bag systems: hits the side of your vehicle. in rollover or in You can be severely injured or killed in a crash rear crashes. Air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don’t replacethem. as you occupants. for some unrestrained If you’re too close an to inflating air bag.

which shows the air bag symbol. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. any air bag when it inflates can be seriously Where Are the Air Bags? injured or killed. Anyone who is up against. Air bagsplus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults. There is a air bag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster. The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-38 for more information. . The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide.To read how. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. but not for young children and infants. The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel. see the part of this manual called “Older Children” or “Infants and Young Children”. 1-70 . or very closeto.

The right front passernger’s frontal air bag is in the If your vehicle has one. 1-71 . bag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door. the driver’s side impact air instrument panel on the passenger’s side.

Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact airbag. When Should an Air Bag Inflate? If your vehicle has one.” 1-72 . But they are designed to inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed “threshold level. the bag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. If something isbetween an occupant and an air bag. and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on ornear any other air bag covering. the right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the side of the passenger’s Frontal Air Bags seatback closest to the door. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes.

especially on rough information which is used to determine if the air bags terrain. no one can say whether an air higher. front seats. because inflation would not vehicle design. on the side of the vehicle that is struck. rear to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For bag. impacts. 1-73 . A side impact air bag will only deploy below this range.” The threshold level can vary with (16 to 25 km/h). The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal bag should have inflated simply because of the damage air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers. Side impact air more severe frontal impacts. As always. however. threshold level can vary. which adjust the amount of restraint according to crash severity. your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air Side Impact Air Bags bags. the threshold level for the the crash severity is above the system’s designed reduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph “threshold level. with specific rollovers or rear impacts. or in many side impacts because inflation For frontal air bags. including off-road usage. inflation is determined by the location Vehicle’s with dual stage air bags are also equipped and severity of the impact. such as a parked car. inflation is determined by the angle would not help the occupant. Driving with Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle in the Index for tips on off-road driving. For moderate frontal impacts. See Off-Road should deploy at a reduced level or at full depoyment. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or Air Bag Systems deform. the threshold level will be In any particular crash. For side impact Seat Position Sensors air bags. The not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts. with special sensors which enablethe sensing system to The air bag system is designed to work properly under monitor the position of both the driver and passenger a wide range of conditions. of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that side crashes. these Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact air air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. A side impact air bag will inflate if doesn’t move or deform. The seat position sensor provides Observe safe driving speeds. Side impact air bags are deployment is about 20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h). so that it can be somewhat above or help the occupant. full deployment occurs. and the threshold level for a full specific vehicle design.In addition. See Air Bag Systems on page 1-68. wear your safety belt.

the air bag sensing as anything more than a supplement to safety belts. and many coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. passenger’s side impact air bag. Side impact air bags would not being able to steer the vehicle. The parts of the bag body. or near frontal collisions. In moderate to severe side instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal collisions. the sensing collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s system triggers a release of gas from the inflator. which frontal air bags. the air bag and side collisions for vehicle’s with a driver’s and right front related hardware are all part of the air bag modules. For vehicles with side impact air bags. The inflator. The air bag supplements the protection provided by safety belts. the side of the vehicle. 1-74 . rollovers. and system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. and only in moderate to severe inflates the air bag. rear impacts. These components include the even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or steering wheel hub for the driver’sfrontal air bag and the the instrument panel. Inflates? After the air bag inflates. including rollovers. but frontal air bags would not help you in many types not too hot to touch. so quickly How Does an Air Bag Restrain? that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Air side impacts. For then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal both frontal and side impact air bags. Some components of the air bag module will be In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions. There will be some smoke and dust of collisions. and rear impacts. Air bags distribute the force of of the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper front passenger’s door will be hot. Air bags should never be regarded In an impact of sufficient severity. even belted occupants can contact the inside air bag. stopping the occupant more gradually. including frontal people from leaving the vehicle. primarily because an occupant’s motion bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or is not toward the air bag. the air bag modules are located in the What Will You See After an Air Bag seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front passenger’s door. hot for a short time. Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel. it quickly deflates.What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. nor does it stop help you in many types of collisions. For vehicles with side impact air bags. But the that come into contact with you may be warm.

break the air bag coverings. This dust could cause breathing problems information about the frontal air bag system. everyone in the system and when the system commands the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe are bag inflation. then get fresh air by opening a deploys. The module also records speed. the air module in the steering wheel. you’ll need some new parts for properly. If you have breathing problems but safety belt usage in a crash in which the air bag can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag deploys or a crash in which the air bag nearly inflates. Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the or the right front passenger’s airbag. Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate and a more severe frontal impact. You may have to replace the air bag your air bag system. both the air bag bag system won’t be there to help protect you module and the instrument panel for the right front in another crash. Improper service can mean that an air bag system won’t work properly. windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. problems following an air bag deployment. Your vehicle is also equipped with a crash WIBum an~air bag inflates. or both the air bag module modules and possibly other parts. If you don’t get them. After an passenger’s seatback. If you experience breathing RPM. brake and throttle data. The for people with a history of asthma or other module records information about the readiness of breathing trouble. which records air. 1-75 . To avoid this. service. A new system will include air bag passenger’s air bag. bag covering on the driver’s and right front Air bags are designed to inflate only once. you 0 Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag should seek medical attention. there is dust in the sensing and diagnostic module. the bag may not work air bag inflates. The service and seatback for the driver’s and right front manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or other parts. or the air right front passenger air bag. engine window or a door. systems. It records the status of the driver’s to do so. See your dealer for In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag.

Canada the symbol for off will be visible. sensing system. your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator on page 3-38. The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator . or the symbol for on or Indicator . When the system check is complete. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety belt. either Bag Status the word ON or the word OFF. The sensors are designed to detect the presenceof a properly-seated occupant and determine if the passenger’s frontal air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.If your rearview The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger’s frontal air bag under certain mirror doesn’t have either of the indicators pictured conditions. will be visible on the rearview mirror during the system Passenger Air check. The driver’s air bag and the side air bags below.United States 1-76 .Passenger Sensing System If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations. then your vehicle doesn’t have the passenger are not part of the passenger sensing system. The indicator will be visible when you turn your ignition key to START or RUN.

the off indicator will light with the person’s legs comfortably extended. a forward-facing child restraint or a booster seat air bag. the right front passenger seat is unoccupied.The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the the right front passenger’s frontal air bag if: Right Front Seat Position on page 1-64 of this manual. is detected. the system determines that a small child is present The passenger sensing system is designed to enable in a forward-facing child restraint. the vehicle and have the person remain in this position The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off for about two minutes. secure the child in the system determines that an infant is present in a the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle rear-facing infant seat. If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle. the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the air bag is active. turn the vehicle off and ask the person system or the passenger sensing system. the right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person. centered on the seat cushion. passenger’s frontal air bag. and check with your dealer. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the then sit upright in the seat. the on indicator is still lit. remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s 1-77 . a right front passenger takes hidher weight off of When the passenger sensing system has allowed the the seat for a period of time. to place the seatback in the full upright position. (may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal air the system determines that a small child is present bag anytime the system senses that a person of adult in a booster seat. This will allow the system to the passenger’s frontal air bag when a rear facing infant detect that person and then enable the passenger’s seat. If the child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit. passenger’s seat. turn the vehicle off. it could be because that person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. air bag to be enabled. Restart and stay lit to remind you that the air bag is off. size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. such as a child who has outgrown If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front child restraints or a very small person. but the off indicator is lit. or if there is a critical problem with the air bag If this happens.

If the air bag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more on this. including important safety information. can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system. it means that somethingmay be wrong with the air bag system. I I -78 . have the vehicle serviced promptly. because an adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger’s seat may not have the protection of the frontal air bag. such as seat covers. If this ever happens. Aftermarket equipment. You may want to consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.

If you add things that change your vehicle’s your vehicle and the air bag system. they may keep the air bag system Information onpage 7-1 1. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to doso. from working properly. To purchase a frame. Air bag systems do not need regular maintenance. There air bag system parts in several places around Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or your vehicle. If you have any questions about this. Also. The phone numbers For up to 1 minute after the ignition keyis and addresses for Customer Assistance are in turned off and the battery is disconnected.Servicing Your Air Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle Bag-Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2. You don’t want the system to inflate while sides of the vehicle that could keep the air someone is working on your vehicle. front end or side sheet service manual. bumper system. 1-79 . you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. see Service Publications Ordering metal or height. Be sure to follow proper service procedures. Avoid yellow connectors. an Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure air bag can still inflate during improper in this manual. the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors. They are probably part of the air bag system. service. Your dealer bags from working properly? and the service manual have information about servicing A: Yes.

and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system Now and then. Checking Your Restraint Systems Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers.) and all your belts. get a new one right away. 1-80 . Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.Restraint System Check Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. latch plates. buckles. retractors and anchorages are working properly. If a belt is torn or frayed. have it repaired. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job. They can rip apart under impact forces. make sure the safety belt reminder light does not need regular maintenance.

Replacing Restraint System Parts If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
After a Crash If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seatparts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
A crash can damage the restraint systems in the collision.
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
not properly protect the person using system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
it,resulting in serious injury or even death in a in this section.
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
L

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.

1-81

Section 2 Features and Controls

Keys ........................................................... -2-3 Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2.25
Remote Keyless Entry System ......................... 2.4 Four-wheel Drive .......................................... 2.28
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2.5 All-Wheel Drive with Stabilitrak@ .................2.32
Doors and Locks ............................................. 2.8 Parking Brake ................................. .....2-35
Door Locks .................................................... 2.8 Shifting Into Park (P) ..................................... 2-36
Power Door Locks .......................................... 2.9 Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................. 2-38
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2.10 Parking Over Things That Burn ....................... 2-39
Programmable Automatic Engine Exhaust ............................................ 2-40
Door Locks ............................................... 2.10 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-40
Rear Door Security Locks .............................. 2-12 Mirrors ........................................................... 2-42
Lockout Protection ........................................ 2.12 Manual Rearview Mirror ................................. 2-42
Liftgate ................................. ....2.13 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Windows ........................................................ 2-15 Onstar@,Compass and Temperature
Manual Windows .......................................... 2.16 Display .................................................... 2-42
Power Windows ............................................ 2.16 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Sun Visors ................................................... 2.17 Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-45
Outside Manual Mirrors .................................. 2-48
Theft-Deterrent Systems .................................. 2.18 Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ......................... 2-48
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................. 2.18 Outside Power Mirrors ................................... 2-48
Passlock@.................................................... 2.20 Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror .................2-49
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2.21 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ..................... 2-49
New Vehicle Break-in .................................... 2.21 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-49
Ignition Positions .......................................... 2.21 Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors .................... 2-50
Starting Your Engine ..................................... 2.22 Outside Convex Mirror ................................... 2-50
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................ 2.23 Outside Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-50
Engine Coolant Heater ................................. -2-24

2- 1

Section 2 Features and Controls

Onstar@ System ................................. , ....-2-51 Luggage Carrier ........................................... 2.57
HomeLink@ Transmitter ....................... .......-2-53 Rear Storage Area ........................................ 2.59
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter ........ 2.54 Convenience Net .......................................... 2.59
Cargo Cover ................................................ 2.59
StorageAreas .................................... ........2.57
Glove Box ....................................... ........2.57 Sunroof ......................................................... 2.60
Cupholder(s) .................................... ........2.57 Vehicle Personalization ................................... 2-61
Front Storage Area ........................... ........2.57 Memory Seat ............................................... 2-61
Center Console Storage Area ............. ........2.57

2-2

Keys

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-3

Your vehicle has one If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
double-sided key for the GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
ignition and all door Assistance Program on page 7-6. If your vehicle is
locks as well as the spare equipped with theOnstar@system with an active
tire hoist lock, if equipped. subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle,
Onstat-@ may beable to send a command to unlock
your vehicle. See OnStaP System on page2-51
for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
assist you with obtaining replacements. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features that 1. This device may not cause interference, and
can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of 2. This device must accept any interference received,
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock including interference that may cause undesired
your keys inside. You may even have to damage operation of the device.
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
spare keys. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

2-4

Changes or modifications to this system by other than Remote Keyless Entry System
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment. Operation
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this: supplied with your vehicle.
Check the distance. You may be too far from your UNLOCK: Pressing this button once will unlock the
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during driver’s door. The parking lamps will flash and the
rainy or snowy weather. interior lights will come on. The ground illumination
lamps will come on. Pressing UNLOCK again within
a Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may three seconds will cause the remaining doors to unlock.
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the The parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and come on.
try again.
LOCK: Pressing this button once will lock all of the
Check to determine if battery replacement is doors. Wait one second, then press LOCK again and the
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under horn will chirp.
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact with
page 2-5. the theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent
0 If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a on page 2- 18.
qualified technician for service.

2-5

Remote Alarm Battery Replacement
When the panic button with the horn symbol on the Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound entry transmitter should last about two years.
and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing the panic work at the normal range in any location. If you have
button again, waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
vehicle. it’s probably time to change the battery.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
Vehicle touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to transmitter.
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.

2-6

To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter 2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
do the following: CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.

1. Insert a dime, or similar object, in the slot between
the covers of the transmitter housing near the key
ring hole. Remove the bottom by twisting the dime.

2-7

Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the keyless entry system (if equipped).
Door Locks You can also use your key.

To lock the door from the
/r\ CAUTION: inside, slide the lever
rearward. To unlock the
door, slide the lever
Unlocked doors can be dangerous. forward.
Passengers - especially children - can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren’t locked.So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.

2-8

18. on either front door to lock all the doors at once. The power door locks will operate at any time even If your vehicle has the delayed locking feature. Operating the power locks may interact with the theft-deterrent system (if equipped). symbol. to unlock all the doors at once. 2-9 . switch. press the bottom of If your vehicle is equipped the switch on either front with power door locks. “Delayed Locking” later in this section.Power Door Locks If your vehicle has this power door lock switch. Press the top of the switch to unlock all the doors Press the recessed side of the switch with the unlock at once. with the lock symbol. see when the ignition is off. door to lock all the doors press the raised side of the at once. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2.

Pull back on 1. To enter the program mode you need to do the To enable or disable the delayed locking feature. If the feature is disabled. entry transmitter a second time. it is equipped with the liftgate open three chimes will signal that delayed a feature that enables you to program your power locking is being used. 2-10 . and hold it while you perform the next step. the doors will lock immediately when a power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter button is pressed. All doors and liftgate can be re-opened for automatically lock all doors when the vehicle is shifted up to five seconds from the time the last door is closed. out of PARK (P). Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button twice. Press and hold the power door lock switch on the the turn signaVmultifunction lever all theway driver’s door in the lock position. You can set the You can lock the door immediately using the power automatic door lock feature to unlock the doors you door lock switch or the optional remote keyless select once the vehicle is in PARK (P). toward you until flash-to-pass is activated. Beginning with the ignition in LOCK.Delayed Locking Programmable Automatic When you lock the doors using the power lock switch or Door Locks the remote keyless entry transmitter with any door or if your vehicle has power door locks. do the following: following: 1. ignition. 2. all the doors Your vehicle left the factory programmed to will lock. door locks. Five seconds after the last door is closed. and all doors unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). The following instructions detail how to program your This feature will not lock the doors if the key is in the door locks.

You will have thirty seconds to begin programming. with The following is a list of the available programming the key in LOCK. panel once. see your dealer 2-11 . repeat the procedure the lock side of the power lock switch on the door beginning with Step 1. programming mode. you will e All door locks/Only the driver’s door unlocks: hear the lock mechanism lock and unlock. release the turn options: signaVmultifunction lever. lock and unlock to indicate you have left the All doors IocWNone of the doors unlock: Press program mode. If panel twice. and then the unlock side three times. For more information. the auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified. Turn your key to RUN and LOCK twice. If you exceed lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel the thirty-second limit. the locks will automatically once. If this occurs. Once you do this. You are now ready to program the automatic door ihe door pmei G W ~and then the unlock side once locks. Press the lock side of the power lock switch on 3. You can exit the program mode any time by turning the e No doors IocWNone of the doors unlock: Press ignition to RUN (the locks will automatically lock and the lock side of the power lock switch on the door unlock to indicate you are leaving the program mode). and then the unlock side twice. Select one of the following four programming e All doors IocWAll doors unlock: Press the options and follow the instructions. Then. This turns off the automatic lock the lock/unlock switches are not pressed while in the feature. 2.

all of the doors will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock. Close the door. To disengage the lock. unlock the door and open the door from the outside. lever forward. This feature is located on 3.Rear Door Security Locks To use one of the locks do the following: If your vehicle is equipped with this feature. Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open. you can 1. lock the rear side doors so they cannot be opened from 2. Open one of the rear doors. 4. move the the inside by passengers. If you want to open the rear door while the security lock is engaged. To engage the rear door security locks. The rear doors or your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use. If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition. the inside edge of the rear doors. Do the same thing to the other rear door. move the lever rearward. 2-12 . 5.

See “Comfort Controls” in the Index. Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the setting on VENT or OUTSIDE AIR. liftgate or rear doors open because be done by using either the power door locks or the carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your remote keyless entry system. lift the handle located in the cause unconsciousness and even death. The liftgate glass can be opened using the button on It Can be dangerous to drive withtnn. 2-13 . This can glass. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. You may also use the keyless entry system or the seal between the body and the liftgate the power door locks to lock the liftgate and liftgate glass. All doors other cable connections must pass through will lock. vehicle. open them all the way. insert the or rear doors open or if electrical wiring or key into the lock button and turn clockwise. It can To open the entire liftgate. liftgate or rear doors: Make sure all other windows are shut. liftgate To lock a power lock system from the outside.liftgate the liftgate after the doors have been unlocked. center of the door. 0 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel. insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise to unlock the glass and liftgate. That will force outside air into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. If you must drive with the liftgate glass.Liftgate Liftgate Glass and Liftgate To open a mechanical lock system from the outside. glass.

see Power Door Locks on page 2-9 earlier To open the driver’s side panel door.Panel Doors To close the doors. first open the in this section. close the passenger’s To open the rear panel doors. Then. information. you must open the side door. put your counterclockwise to unlock it. If you have power door locks. pull on the as the rear doors from inside the vehicle. If the door is locked. 2-14 . pull the handle on the left door edge out and pull the door open. insert your door key in the lock and turn it To lock the rear doors from outside the vehicle. close the driver’s side door first. Make sure both doors are latched securely. passenger’s side panel door first. passenger’s side door. key in the lock and turn it clockwise. After securely closing the door. you can lock the side doors as well To open the passenger’s side panel door. For more handle and pull the door open.

2-15 .Windows Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

Express-Down Windows The driver and passenger windows also has an express down feature that allows the windows to be lowered without holding the switch. If you have power windows. The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the switch. Press the forward edge of the switch to lower the window. Your power windows will work when Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or lower the manual windows. To open the window partway. lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired position. Power Windows Pull up the front edge of the switch to raise the window. the controls are located on each of the side doors. Press the front edge of the window switch for one secondto activate the express down mode.Manual Windows The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger’s windows as well. when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. 2-16 . See Ignition Positions on page 2-21.

The lockout switch bottom visors (if equipped). the passenger’s power windows cover to turn on the lamps. button labeled is engaged. Your visors may feature prevents all windows from operating.Lock-Out Switch Sun Visors If you have power windows. when the front driver’s door glare protection. This the bottom visor from side-to-side. press the switch again and the indicator light will go off. 2-17 . you can swing down the top and window switch has a lockout feature. except from have an extension that can be pulled out for additional the driver’s position. and an indicator light Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror will illuminate. To engage the lock-out feature press the switch. To disengage the feature. to adjust the brightness of the lamps. You can also swing is located in front of the power window switches. the driver’s door power To block out glare. pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror button is not engaged. There is a slide switch will operate. When the If equipped.

the 3. there are ways you the remote keyless entry transmitter. If using the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security light will stop flashing security light will flash as and stay solid. the alarm will go off. then will turn off to save the battery power. If the delayed locking feature is active. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or impossible to steal. the door does not Content Theft-Deterrent need to be open. The alarm is not armed your ignition is off). especially in some cities. The security can help. to let until the security light goes off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about two minutes. With this system. Close all doors. Open the door. and the security light goes off. keyless entry transmitter.Theft-Deterrent Systems This message reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent system. you know that you are If a door is opened without the key or the remote activating the system. However. 2-18 . The light should go off after you open the door (if approximately 30 seconds. we know that nothing we put on it can make it 2. light should come on and flash. the alarm Your vehicle may be equipped with a content will not be activated until all doors are closed theft-deterrent alarm system. Here’s how to do it: Vehicle theft is big business. features. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent 1.

close the door and wait for system. or use the remote with the manual door lock and open the door. lower the driver’s window entry transmitter. key after the doors are closed. The horn fuse may be blown. vehicle’s headlamps flash. Unlocking a door any should set off the alarm. 2-19 . If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent 3. UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter or If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps by placing the key in the ignition and turning it to do not flash. Then reach in through the window. you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off. 2. see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-97. To replace with the key. check to see if the horn If you set off the alarm by accident. From inside the vehicle. You should also remember that and open the driver’s door. the vehicle should be serviced by an START. or Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident: with the remote keyless entry transmitter. Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open. This keyless entry transmitter. the vehicle should be locked with the door the security light to go out. unlock any door works.Remember. unlock the door Always unlock a door with a key. It activates only if you use a power door lock The alarm can be tested by following these steps: switch with the door open. the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if Testing the Alarm you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock. 4. or withthe remote keyless 1. Get out of the vehicle. other way will set off the alarm if the system If the alarm does not sound when it should but the has been armed. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing the fuse. authorized service center.

However. not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Center. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 7-6 wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart under Customer Assistance Information. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock@ at this Passlock@is a passive theft-deterrent system. time. the engine. 2-20 . If a correct key is not used or the dealer for service. You may also want to check the fuse (see Passlock@enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-97.) See your turned with a valid key. In an emergency.Passlock@ If the engine is running and the security light comes on. Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts. call the GM Roadside Assistance If the engine stalls and the security light flashes. ignition lock cylinder is tampered with. you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the Your vehicle is equipped with the engine off. your Passlock@ systemis Passlock@theft-deterrent system. fuel is disabled.

A Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322km) or so. transmission. power windows and the windshield wipers when the engine is off.See “Towing turned to LOCK. You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.Starting and Operating Your Ignition Positions Vehicle With the key in the ignition switch. Don’t make full-throttle starts.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for L the first 500 miles (805 km). 2-2 1 . Follow this breaking-in A (LOCK): This position locks your ignition and guideline every time you get new brake linings. Don’t drive at any one speed. you can turn the key to four different positions. New Vehicle Break-in C Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate “break-in.fast or slow . During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet brokenin. B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like the radio. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.for the first500 miles (805 km). Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. a Trailer” in the Index for more information.

To restart when you’re already moving. and 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to Onstar@System (if equipped) will work when the ignition be drained much sooner. Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than Your radio. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 1. then your vehicle needs service.Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you Starting Your Engine can’t turn it. use NEUTRAL (N) only. And the excessiveheat key is in RUN or ACCESSORY. push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor. Notice: Don’t try to shift toPARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. C (RUN): This is the position for driving.If none of these works. 2-22 . Wait about turned from RUN to LOCK. if so. safety feature. while you hold the ignition key in START. Once the key is can damage your starter motor. your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the Your engine won’t start in any other position . power windows. sunroof (if equipped). is it all the way in? Turn the key only with Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).that’s a key or the ignition switch. turn the Your vehicle may be equipped with a Retained ignition key to START. When the engine starts. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds. If you do. your battery or damaging yourstarter. 2. Accessory Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain let go of the key. you could damage the D (START): This position starts your engine. 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF. With your foot off the accelerator pedal. let go of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal. The idle speed will go down as features on your vehicle to continue to work up to your engine gets warm. transmission. When the engine starts. these features will continue 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining to work for up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened. Wait about 15 seconds between each try. be sure you are using the correct key.

When the engine The switch used to adjust starts. If you don't. do this: 1. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Before addingelectrical equipment. 2-23 . you can ignition key to START and hold it there up to change the position of the throttle and brake pedals. let go of This feature is designed for shorter drivers. check with your dealer. stops). Press the arrow at the far end of the switch to move the pedals away from your body. floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds. If the the pedals is located on vehicle starts briefly but then stops again. do the the driver's side door same thing. you could change the way the engine operates. Press the arrow at the end of the switch closest to you to move the pedals closer to your body. it could be flooded with too much gasoline. since the key. the pedals can not move farther away from the standard 2. If you add electrical parts or accessories. 75 seconds. for five or six seconds. your engine might not perform properly.When starting your engine in very cold weather (below Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 0°F or -18"C). The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the operate. When the engine starts. but can move forward for better pedal reach. turn the If your vehicle is equipped with this feature. With your foot off the accelerator pedal. Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. let go of the key and accelerator. but this time keep the pedal down panel. If your engine still won't start (or starts but then position.

near the power steering fluid of trying to list everything here. If the cord prior to starting your won’t reach. Plug it into a normal. Plug the cord into a properly grounded minimum of four hours three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. grounded 1 IO-volt AC outlet. we ask that you contact reservoir. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature. Before starting the engine. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. wnded outlet ! starting and better could cause an electrical shock. The kind of oil you have. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. the engine coolant heater can ~ help. from moving engine parts. the coolant heater and cause a fire. refer to your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your diesel supplement for location. Usually. be sure to unplug and At temperatures above 32°F (OOC). If you have a diesel engine.Engine Coolant Heater 3.0°F (-18°C) or colder. 4. Instead cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. Turn off the engine. You could be seriously should be plugged in a injured. the fuel economy during wrong kind of extension cord could overheat engine warm-up. use a heavy-duty three-prong vehicle. You’ll get easier PIL.. If you don’t. Also. and some other things. it could be To Use the Engine Coolant Heater damaged.--lg the cord into an una. vehicle. ~ In very cold weather. use of the coolant store the cord as it was before to keep it away heater is not required. 2-24 . the 2. 1. extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

always set your powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being parking brake and move the shift lever to moved out of PARK (P).wheel drive.not in NEUTRAL. your vehicle will shift lever is not fullyin PARK (P) with the be free to roll. even when within the instrument panel cluster. PARK (P) .if your transfer caseis in Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis NEUTRAL. It’s the Index. If you have left the drive gear. So. See “Shifting Into Park (P)”in the PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.Automatic Transmission Operation There are several different positions for your shift lever. be sure the transfer case is in a running unless you have to. because your vehicle can’t move easily. PARK (P). If you’re pulling a trailer.even if your shift leveris in parking brake firmly set. This display must be you’re on fairly level ground.De injure . two-wheel high (2H) or four. the vehicle can move high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) . 2-25 .wheel engine running. It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the If you have four.see “Towing a best position to use when you start your engine Trailer” in the Index. IU or 4 lers cl---. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission su enly.J and features an electronic shift position indicator be sure your vehicle won’tmove. Your vehicle can roll. See ”Shifting into Park (P)” in CAUTION: (Continued) the index.

. Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more. and you’re: To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow.. you need more power for passing. It can help control your speed as you go down Don’t shift into a drivegear while your engine steep mountain roads. being towed. push your ice or sand without damaging your transmission. SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but your vehicle could move very rapidly. use NEUTRAL (N) only. than DRIVE (D). You lower fuel economy. “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. driving on steep hills or for off-road driving.. carrying NEUTRAL (N) when your two-wheel drive vehicle is a heavy load. Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h). Also. push the accelerator all the way down.REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. but then you would also want to is racing. however it offers more power and lower fuel economy Sh----ng into ad. THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving. hills. e gear w Je your engine is . use your brakes off and on. To restart when you’re already moving. use DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer. If stopped. see If You Are Stuck: In Sand. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicleis DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Notice: Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle the engine racingisn’t covered by your warranty. a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often. !-26 . accelerator pedal about halfway down. your engine doesn’t You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. You can use SECOND (2) on could lose control and hit people or objects. You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD ( 3 ) or. . Mud. NEUTRAL (N): In this position. connect with the wheels. Unless your foot is firmly on the brakepedal. is moving forward could damage your transmission. Ice or Snow on page 4-50. if necessary.

You could damage your transmission. This is intended to improve heater performance. See Towing transmission is designed to shift differently until the a Trailer on page 4-59 for more information. or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward. the transmission will drive in second gear. don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. Notice: If your rear wheels won’t turn. approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder. the selector button is located on the end of the your vehicle in position on ahill. column shift lever. the transmission won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough. You can use it on very steep hills. You may use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces. Also. 2-27 . If Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold so. engine reaches normal operating temperature. Your vehicle may be equipped with a tow/haul mode. FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. don’t try to drive. You can use this feature to assist On cold days. This could overheat and damage the transmission.If you manually select SECOND (2) in a light duty Tow/HauI Mode automatic transmission. your when towing or hauling a heavy load. if you stop when going uphill.

Read the part that follows before using four-wheel drive. Be sure to set Four-wheel Drive the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL. you shift the transfer case. The tow/haul mode also interacts with the AutorideTM feature. See cause your vehicle to rolleven if the AutorideTM on page 4-58. See the appropriate text for the transfer case in your vehicle. 2-28 . to enhance SI_ _ _ _ _ _ _ re transfer case to ~ . you must be familiar with its operation. transmission is in PARK (P). To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel drive. You or someone else could be seriously injured. if your vehicle is so equipped. When tow/haul mode is Front Axle Locking Feature selected the tow/haul indicator light will The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when illuminate.. Some delay for the axle to lock or 1 -ock is normal. engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. you can send your the Index. Notice: Driving in the 4-WHEEL HIGH (4HI) or 4-WHEEL LOW (4LO) positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle’s drivetrain. ’ R L can the ride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See ”Parking Brake” in If your vehicle has four-wheel drive.

such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations. and highway situations. This setting also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. the front axle is engaged. but the are located to the left of vehicle’s power is sent only to the rear wheels. You can choose among four driving settings: You might choose 4LO if you are driving off-road in a(2HI): This setting is used for driving in most street deep sand. deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills. the system cluster. (4HI): Use the 4HI position when you need extra traction. Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI. deep mud.Automatic Transfer Case AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road conditions are variable. This setting also provides the best fuel economy. this setting. When the instrument pane! the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Your frontaxle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. You may never need drive. will automatically engage four-wheel drive. (4LO): This setting also engages your front axle Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel and delivers extra torque. When driving your vehicle The transfer case buttons in AUTO 4WD. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. This is the best setting to use when plowing snow. 2-29 .

If the SERVICE 4WD message stayson. 2-30 .8 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). If for some reason the transfer and/or moving. This can be done at any speed (except when shifting from 4LO). the 4LO indicator light will flash for case cannot make a requested shift. and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4. Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can Shifting into 4HI or AUTO 4WD cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone Press and release the 4 hi or AUTO 4WD switch.6 to 3. shifting the transfer case. you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service. It will remain illuminated when If the 4 lo switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear the shift is complete. If the lights and release the 4 lo switch. See ”Parking Brake” in the Index. Press turn on the ignition and one will stay on.2 km/h). Indicator lights in the switches show which setting you The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have are in. You must wait for the do not come on. Be sure to set can be done at any speed (except when shifting from 4LO). and the indicator light will flash while shifting. case in NEUTRAL. See Shifting into 4LO Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-53 or Towing To shift to the 4 lo position. you should take your vehicle to your 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain dealer for service. See ”Service 4WD message” under Driver lnformafion Center (DIC) on page 3-52. vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4. Shifting into 2HI Press and release the 2 hi switch. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1. This else could be seriously injured. the parking brake before placing the transfer It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed. it will return to the 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your last chosen setting. An indicator light will flash while illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear. NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. After 30 seconds the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen. the ignition must be in RUN Your Vehicle on page4-53 for more information.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

Set the parking brake. The preferred method for shifting out not roil of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 rnph 2. If the 4HI. 6. Turn the ignition to OFF. then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second. The red NEUTRAL light 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your will come on when the transfer case shift to vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4. (1. AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch. 8. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will the ignition in RUN. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one second. the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). the 4HI. Press and release the 4HI. You must wait for the 4HI. AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving.8 km/h) and NEUTRAL is complete. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P). 2-31 . 11. 10.2 km/h). Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle. Shift the transfer case to 2HI. and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission 5.6 to 3.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and 1. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashing 4. 3. into gear. AUTO 4WD or 2HI your To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following: vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for buttons for 10 seconds. 9. 7.Shifting Out of 4LO Shifting into NEUTRAL To shift from 4LO to 4HI. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). Release the parking brake prior to towing.

It ignition to RUN with the engine off. Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the different modes may cause the transfer case to enter the shift protection mode. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake all the time. engine power is sent to all four wheels 1. This is like four-wheel drive.Shifting Out of NEUTRAL All-Wheel Drive with Stabilitrak@ To shift out of NEUTRAL: With this feature. 2-32 . and adjust itself as needed for 3. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL are located to the left of the red light will go out. Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. pedal. The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to three minutes. to the desired position. is fully automatic. position (2HI. AUTO 4WD OR 4 LO). 4HI. This will protect the transfer case from possible damage and will only allow the transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds. the instrument panel 5. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift road conditions. but there is no separate 2. The transfer case buttons 4. You may start the engine and shift the transmission cluster.

You might choose 4LO if you are driving off-road in deep sand.6 to 3. It will remain illuminated when m ( 4 L O ) : This setting delivers extra torque. you should climbing or descending steep hills. You or someone The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.You can choose among three driving settings: NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. you should take your vehicle to your all four wheels as needed depending on road and dealer for service. case into Neutral. it will return to the never need this setting. See SERVICE 4WD under Driver lnformation Center ( D E ) on page 3-52. For more information on wing indicator lights in the switches show which setting you Stabilitrak@ seeStabilitrap System on page 4. all four wheels. transmission is in PARK (P).8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). If the lights do not come on. It sends maximum power to last chosen setting. the ignition must be in RUN Shifting the transfer caseto NEUTRAL can and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than cause your vehicle to roll even if the 3 mph (4. take your vehicle to your dealer for service. You must wait for the case in NEUTRAL. deep mud. illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear. See fa (Stabilitrak@): This button is used with the Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-53 or Towing Stabilitrak@ system andis also used to shift the transfer Your Vehicle on page 4-53 for more information. If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift. Shifting into 4LO To shift to the 4LO position. An indicator light will flash while driving conditions. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you La (All-Wheel Drive): This setting delivers power to turn on the ignition and one will stay on. You may the shift is complete.2 km/h). shifting the transfer case. deep snow and If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on.11. Press the parking brake before placing the transfer and release the 4LO switch. 2-33 . are in. See ”Parking Brake” in 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain the Index.

Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN information see Stabi/itrak@System on page 4-1 1. the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). Release the parking brake prior to towing. 2-34 . Simultaneously press and hold the Stabilitrak@ and The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to 4LO buttons for 10 seconds. or moving less than 3 mph (4. Shifting Out of 4LO 5. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one remain illuminated before shifting your transmission second. the AWD indicator light will flash for 10. then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D) into gear. gear and/or moving. Set the parking brake. The red NEUTRAL have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1. To shift from 4LO to AWD your vehicle must be stopped 6. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). When in 4L0. Turn the ignition to LOCK. 4. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P). the 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following: vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4. for the AWD indicator light to stop flashing and 8. light will come on when the transfer case shift Press and release the AWD switch.8 km/h) and the 1. Shift the transfer case to AWD. You must wait to NEUTRAL is complete. If the AWD switch is pressed when your vehicle is in 9. the vehicle stability is disabled. 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).2 km/h).8 km/h) and ’1. For more 3. After 30 seconds not roll the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in Shifting into NEUTRAL gear and/or moving. 7.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in RUN.6 to 3. for one second. 2.

You may have to replace them. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off. Parking Brake To release the parking brake. hold the regular brake pedal down. 2-35 . to release the parking brake. and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle. hold the regular brake pedal above the parking brake pedal. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL the red light will go out. YOU may start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired position. Push down the parking brake symbol.Shifting Out of NEUTRAL To shift out of NEUTRAL: 1. cause your rear brakes to overheat. 3. A chime will activate and the warning light will flash the brake system warning light will go off. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal. 5. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift position (All-Wheel Drive or 4LO). located To set the parking brake. If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released. brake pedal with your left foot. 2. when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can three seconds. with the parking down with your right foot. see Towing a Trailer on page 4-59. 4. Pull the bottom edge of the lever.

Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake. transfer case is in a drive gear . With four-wheel drive. use the steps that follow. if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. If you have left the engine running.You or others could be injured. If you’re pulling a trailer. your vehicle will be free to roll. even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). 2-36 . I It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset.not in NEUTRAL.To be sure your vehicle won’t move.SYftinF Y o Park (P) 2. 1. Your vehicle can roll. be sure the Pull the shift lever toward you. So. the vehicle can move suddenly. even when you’re on fairly level ground. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this: ~~ . see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

running. 3. If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case isin a drive 0 Move the lever up as far as it will go.not in And. After you move the shift lever into PARK (P). Turn the ignition key to LOCK. You or others could be injured. 2-37 . Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset.not in NEUTRAL. hold the regular brake pedal down. if you leave the vehicle with the engine NEUTRAL (N). your vehicle is in PARK (P). If you can your vehicle with the engine running unless leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your you have to. even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Don’t leave 5. Remove the key and take it with you. 4. it could overheat and even catch fire. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear . gear -. your vehicle will be free to roll. hand. be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.

try this: the driver’s seat. Then. If torque lock does occur. pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission. move the shift lever out of 2. see Shifting lnto Park (P) on page 2-36. You may find it difficult to pull the PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. set the parking brake and If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave out of PARK (P). shift lever out of PARK (P). ease pressure on vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into in the transmission. 2-38 . 3. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock PARK (P). the weight of the If you cannot shift out of PARK (P). Have the system fixed as soon as you can. See Automatic Transmission If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your Operation on page 2-25. If you can. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the you want. This is called ”torque move the shift lever into the gear you want. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N). so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).” To prevent torque lock. 5. When you are ready to drive. 1. you may need to have another 4. transmission into PARK (P) properly. PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. control system.Then. To find out how. see if you can move the shift lever away from Shifting Out of Park (P) PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. lock. Turn the key to LOCK. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the Torque Lock ignition is in RUN.

Parking Over Things That Burn JS 1 tcan burn could touc lot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don't park over papers. leaves. 2-39 . dry grass or other things that can burn.

But if you ever have to ‘?ere are some thi7gs to know Engine exhaust can kill. modified improperly. ”Engine Exhaust. this can happen is agarage. idling in a closed-in place can let deadly Your vehicle was damaged when driving carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicleeven over high points on the road or over road if the fan isat the highest setting. You might have exhaust coming in if: Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into Your exhaust system sounds strange or your vehicle. One place debris.Enciqe Exhaust m Running Your Engine While You Are Parked It’s better not to park with the engine running. It can cause unconsciousness and death. your vehicle: Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO.with Repairs weren’t done correctly. 2-40 . See the earlier Caution under different. which you can’t see or smell.can come in easily. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO). CO . Exhaust . Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. See If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into “Winter Driving” in theIndex. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. and Have your vehicle fixed immediately.” Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. NEVER park in a Your vehicle or exhaust system had been garage with the engine running. Also.

not is running unless you have to. the vehicle can move suddenly. Always set your parking brake. So. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-36. see Towing a Trailer on PARK (P). engine running. If you’ve left the in NEUTRAL.It can be dangerousto get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll.To Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t be sure your vehicle won’t move. the parking brake firmly set. page 4-59. you’re on fairly level ground. even when move. You or others could be injured. Your vehicle can even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). 2-4 1 . Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine sure the transfer caseis in a drivegear . be roll. always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to If you’re pulling a trailer.

1.Mirrors The mirror also includes a duel display in the upper right corner of the mirror face. with Onstar@. see Temperature Display below. Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare 6 (On/Off): This is the on/off button. briefly to Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror turn the comp/temp display on or off. you will need to calibrate the compass. After approximately four seconds of inactivity. located to the far left. When on. Push the tab away from you for normal daytime operation. The compass reading and the outside temperature will both appear in the display Manual Rearview Mirror at the same time. or "C appears. Temperature and Compass Display Press the on/off button. from headlamps behind you after dark. Press the button again to change the display to the desired unit of measurement. Your vehicle may have this feature. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately I I four seconds until either a flashing OF. For more information on calibration. the new unit will be locked in and the compass/temperature display will return. 2.Compass and If the display reads CAL. 2-42 . an To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the electrochromic mirror automatically dims to the proper following: level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.

It will be necessaryto adjust the compassto compensate for compass varianceif you live outside of zone eight.as during a long distance cross-country trip. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a between earth’s magnetic northand true geographic zone number appears in the display. 2-43 . press and hold the on/off button for approximately six seconds until the green light comes on. Under certain circumstances. Turn off the electrochromic mirror function by pressing and holding the on/off button for approximately six seconds until the green indicator light turns off. Make sure the green indicator light. Po operate the electrochromic mirror do the following: 1. indicating that the mirror is in electrochromic (self dimming) mode. Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.Electrochromic Mirror Operation To adjust for compass variance do the following: The electrochromic (self dimming) mirror function is 1. number on the following zone map. Find your current location and variance zone turned on automatically each time the ignition is started. is now in zone mode. The compass north. is lit. Compass variance is the difference 2. located to the left of the on/off button. If notadjusted to account for compass variance.it will be necessaryto adjust for compass variance. your compasscould give false readings. If it’s not. 2.

CAL must be displayed in the zone number appears in the display. and the comp/temp display will return. Calibrate the compass as described below. magnetic indicator. and the compass zone variance is set correctly. or an air bag symbol in Canada. If CAL is not displayed. the new zone number will be locked in until CAL is displayed. push button. Release the mirror compass windows. After approximately four seconds of the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or inactivity. 2-44 . there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. for Passenger Air Bag Indicator example). when the The compass does not display the correct heading passenger air bag is engaged. Such interference may Your vehicle may be equipped with a passengerair bag be caused by a magnetic antenna mount. or The compass may need calibration if one of the drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after following occurs: several turns the compass will become calibrated and will display a direction. the display does not show a compass heading (N for North. If your vehicle has this feature. 3. The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways: 4. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired In order to calibrate. on the mirror glass. the mirror will displaythe word ON. note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less Compass Calibration until the display reads a direction. After approximately five seconds. see Passenger Sensing System on page 1-76. For more information. just above the buttons.

After approximately four seconds of inactivity. The compass reading and the outside temperature will both appear in the display at the same time. automatically dim to the temperature display between Fahrenheit or Celsius. use a paper towel or similar The temperature can be displayed by pressing the material dampened with glass cleaner. To the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. when on. 2-45 . Do not spray TEMP button. alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius. If your vehicle is equipped with an electrochromic Press and release the TEMP button to toggle the mirror. The mirror also includes a display in the upper right corner of the mirror face. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly. press and hold the TEMP button for approximately four seconds until the display blinks OF Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror and "C. please consult your after dark.Cleaning the Mirror Temperature Display When cleaning the mirror. the display Display will stop blinking and display the last selection made. glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause will toggle the temperature reading on and off. dealer. proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you If an abnormal reading is displayed. The dual display can be turned on or off by briefly pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button. it will. Press and release the TEMP button to with Compass and Temperature toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings.

there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Do not spray The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways: glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h) the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. If CAL is not displayed. in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds When cleaning the mirror. material dampened with glass cleaner. or drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after several turns the compass will become calibrated and will display a direction. magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. e The compass does not display the correct heading When the ignition and the compass feature are on. or until the vehicle is restarted. Such interference may Compass Operation be caused by a magnetic antenna mount. example). right of the TEMP button will still turn on or off to show you when the electrochromic feature is activated. for is turned back on. e After approximately five seconds. or less until the display reads a direction.Electrochromic Mirror Operation Compass Calibration The time period you need to press and hold the TEMP The compass may need calibration if one of the button to turn the electrochromic feature on or off is following occurs: approximately eight seconds. compass will show two character boxes for In order to calibrate. 2-46 . the mirror compass windows. After two seconds. the and the compass zone variance is set correctly. CAL must be displayed in the approximately two seconds. The indicator light to the e If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle. push mirror will display the compass heading. use a paper towel or similar or until CAL is displayed. it will remain off until it not show a compass heading (N for North. Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass on or off. the display does Once the mirror is turned off.

If you have this feature the mirror will display the word ON. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds until a zone number appears in the display. If not adjusted to account for compass variance. or an airbag symbol in Canada. when the passenger air bag is engaged. as during a long distance cross-country trip. the display indicator on the mirror glass. To adjust for compass variance: 1.Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. Compassvariance is the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. your compasscould give false readings. Your mirror may be equipped with a passenger air bag After you stop pressing the button. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror Passenger Air Bag Indicator until the new zone number appears in the display. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map. For more information see Passenger Sensing System on page 1-76 2-47 . it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance. just above the buttons. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you h e outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances. 2. 3. will show a compass direction within a few seconds.

convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror performance.Outside Manual Mirrors Outside Power Mirrors Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the If your vehicle is equipped side of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects with power outside mirrors. If your vehicle is equipped with camper-type mirrors. behind you. then press the dots located on the four-way control pad to adjust the mirror. Outside Camper-Type Mirrors I Move the selector switch located above the control pad to the left or right to choose the mirror you want to adjust. Pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer. . The mirrors also include a memory function which works in conjunction with the memory seats. they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view of the objects behind you. The mirrors can be folded in to enter the controls are located narrow areas. on the driver’s door The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on armrest. See “Memory Seats” in the Index for more information.

This feature is controlled by the on and off settings found on the electrochromic If your vehicle is equipped with outside power foldaway mirror. move the upper selector switch. To return the mirrors and the mirror glass to their To extend the mirrors move the selector switch. to the middle position. 2-49 . If your vehicle is equipped with this feature. Press the right side of the mirror control to slide the mirror heads toward the body of Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror the vehicle. of the vehicle. The If the mirrors are manually folded. the mirror control to slide the mirror heads away from the body of the vehicle. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with mirrors the mirrors can be folded in toward the body Compass and Temperature Display onpage 2-45. have a clear view of objects behind you. Press the left side of mirror control to return it to it’s original position. the driver’s side outside mirror will adjust for the glare of Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors headlamps behind you. to the middle position. To fold in the mirrors. use the power mirror control will illuminate. they can be adjusted so you can can release the mirror control. located above the mirror control. Press the right side of the mirror control to fold the mirrors toward the body of the vehicle. located normal position press the left side of the mirror control. you camper-type mirrors. above the mirror control.Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror The mirror glass on one or both sides of the vehicle may automatically adjust before the mirror folds inward. If your vehicle is equipped with outside power When the mirror glass or mirror starts moving.

To turn on the defrost feature. See Driver Information The outside rearview mirrors with this option have a Center (DIC) on page 3-52. could hit a vehicle on your right. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Control Systemon page 3-24 for further information. press the rear window defogger button. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R). REVERSE (R).Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors Outside Convex Mirror If your vehicle has the optional memory package Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the The vehicle’s mirrors are capable of performing the curb driver’s seat. 2-50 . Check your To change the preselected tilt position. You may be able to enabled/disable this feature through Outside Heated Mirrors the Driver Information Center. This feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb I when you are parallel parking. This feature will cause the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will If you cut too sharply into the right lane. When the vehicle is A convex mlrror can make things (like other shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a short delay vehicles) look farther away than they really are. this new position is saved in memory as the tilt position. A convex you may have this feature. view assist mirror function. adjust the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in before changing lanes. has occurred. defrost mode. you return to its original position.

You can easily upgrade or extend your Route Support Onstar@services to meet your personal needs. contact Onstar@at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). and state of the art call centers to provide you with a wide range of Onstar@MED-NET (Requires separate activation safety. security. or press the blue Onstar@button to speak to an Onstar@ advisor 24 hours a day.onstar. and annual fee on some plans) An Onstar@subscription plan is included in the price Online and Personal Concierge Services of your vehicle. RideAssist A complete Onstar@ user’s guide and the terms and conditions of the Onstar@Subscription Service Information and Convenience Services Agreement are included in your Onstar@-equipped vehicle’s glove box literature. 7 days a week.com. visit www. 2-5 1 .Onstar@System Onstar@Services Onstar@provides a number of service plans to closely meet your needs. Some of the services currently provided by Onstar@ are: Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking AccidentAssist Remote Door Unlock Onstar@ usesglobal positioning system (GPS) satellite Remote Diagnostics technology. wireless communications. information and convenience services. For more information.

Onstar@Personal Calling Onstar@Steering Wheel Controls With Onstar@Personal Calling. A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required prior to delivery of Onstar@services and prepaid calling minutes are also required for Onstar@Personal Calling and Onstar@Virtual Advisor use. You can place wheel control buttons calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no you can use them contracts. You listen to your e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers. and reply with your hands on the wheel and your eyes on the road. to the Onstar@owner’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box. you have a safer way to stay connected while driving. refer OnStaP system. 2-52 . To to interact with the find out more about Onstar@Personal Calling. no roaming charges and no access fees. or call Onstar@at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). Onstar@Virtual Advisor With Onstar@Virtual Advisor you can listen to your See the Onstar@manual provided with your vehicle for favorite news. Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be found at www. more information.onstar. such as traffic and weather reports. It’s a hands-free wireless (((7: If your vehicle is equipped with the steering phone that’s integrated into your vehicle.com. stock quotes and sports scores. entertainment and information topics.

provides a way to replace up to three Changes and modifications to this system by other than hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators. HomeLink@ informationcan be found on the internet at www. including interference that may cause undesired operation. receiver. security systems and home lighting. 2-53 . Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference.homelink. entry door an authorized service facility could void authorization locks. and (2) this device must accept any interference. garage door openers. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.HomeLink* Transmitter This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. and (2) this device must accept any interference received. including interference that may cause undesired operation of HomeLink@ a combined universal transmitterand the device. Additional to use this equipment.

The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then accurate transmission of the radio frequency. noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” later in this section. Release both buttons. after 20 seconds. rapidly after HomeLink@ successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and/orthird Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink@buttons. Press and hold down the two outside buttons. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired internet at: www. door or gate operator you are programming.It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle. 1982. It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more 4. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink@ buttons while keeping the indicator light in view. Buttons” or. Do not hold down the manufactured before April 1. 2. door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse” releasing only when the indicator light begins to feature.homelink. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about the programmed HomeLink@buttons should be erased 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink@ for security purposes. When Some entry gates and garage door openers may programming a garage door. well as for future HomeLink@ programming. for assistance. Follow these steps to Transmitter program up to three channels: Do not use the HomeLink@Transmitter with any garage 1. 2-54 . button. it is advised to park outside require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure of the garage. This includes any garage door opener model flash.com or by calling button on HomeLink@ and the hand-held transmitter 1-800-355-3515. contact HomeLink@ onthe 3.Programming the HomeLink Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter. Do not release the buttons until Step 4 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage has been completed.

antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. then release. begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink@. Firmly press and hold the and observe the indicator light. programmed channels. Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the To program the remaining two HomeLink@buttons. Repeat the press/hold/release If the indicator light stays on constantly. programmed HomeLink@ buttonfor two seconds. Similarly. locate the “Learn” or “Smart” transmission. gate operators are manufactured to “time out” in the same manner. 7. repeat this sequence a third time released.S.5. a garage door opener). and then turns toa constant light. HomeLink@should now activate your rolling code begin with Step2 under “Programming HomeLink@. and depending on the programming is complete and your device should brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling activate when the Homeiink@button is pressed and code device). sequence a second time. This may not be long enough for button. Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter 6. You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8. Return to the vehicle. to complete the programming. continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the Gate Operator and Canadian programming of a rolling-code equipped device Programming (most commonly. This can usually be found where the hanging HomeLink@to pick up the signal during programming.”Do not If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds repeat Step 1. 2-55 . To program the remaining two HomeLink@buttons. some U. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink@button 8. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of unit) in the garage.” equipped device. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button.

2. replace Step 3 under “Programming HomeLink@”with the following: Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkO Continue to press and hold the HomeLink@button while Button you press and release every two seconds (cycle) To program a device to HomeLinkO using a HomeLink@ your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has button previously trained.Release both buttons. proceed with Step 2 under “Programming Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink@button for at HomeLink@. For questions or comments. While still holding the HomeLink@ Using HomeLinkO button. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLinkO 1. where you live). 3. follow these steps: been successfully accepted by HomeLink@. but they can be programming a gate operator by using the reprogrammed.” 2-56 . Do Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink@’ not release the button. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until indicator light turns off. or on the internet at HomeLink@is now in the train (learning) mode and can www. 1.homelink. the indicator light begins to flash. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.com. to complete. after 20 seconds. 2.” least half of a second.If you live in Canada. Release both buttons. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. following: 2. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds. or you are having difficulty Individual buttons can not be erased. be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLinkO. Press and hold the desired HomeLink@button. Resetting Defaults To reset HomeLink@to default settings do the following: Erasing HomeLink@Buttons 1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about To erase programming from the three buttons do the 20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted. See “Reprogramming a Single “Programming HomeLink@”procedures (regardless of HomeLinkO Button” next. contact HomeLink@ at 1-800-355-3515.

The console has a place to store coins. vehicle. let the siderails or siderail supports. Your vehicle may have cupholders located in the front and rear floor console or in the second seat fold down armrest and in the quarter trim. Luggage Carrier If you have the luggage carrier. 2-57 . Your vehicle may be equipped with a center armrest The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached to storage compartment in the front bench seat. To open your glove box. Cupholder(s) Your console has a cupholder that swings down for the rear seat passengers to use. Then. (91 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage disc holder. lid pop up and swing open. your vehicle. lift up the latch and pull the TG open it. Load your cargo so that it rests on the slats and does not scratch or damage the vehicle.Put the cargo against the side rails and fastenit securely to the luggage carrier. Tie the load to the handle located at the front of the armrest. the roof and crossrails which can be moved back To open it. Put the mainweight as far forward as youcan. fold down the armrest and press the latch and forth to help secure cargo.Storage Areas Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle may be equipped with a console Glove Box compartment between the bucket seats. press the button and swing the console door open. Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than The storage compartment may have a cassette/compact 200 Ibs. never The storage compartment also has a tray to use for let them hang over the rear or the sides of your writing. you can load things on Front Storage Area top of your vehicle. When you carry large things. lid open.

crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. If plywood is used. Make sure the crossrail is secured. Push the release handle back into the latched To move the crossrails do the following: position and slide the crossrail back and forth 1. Loosen the thumbscrew at each end.Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when If you need to carry long items. damaged. fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle. see ”Loading Your Vehicle”. For more information on vehicle as far apart as they will go. 2. pull out on the latch release handle at each end. cut a piece of 3/%inch plywood to load doors. cargo forward onto the two front crossrails. If small heavy objects are placed on the roof. place cargo on the roller and roll the the desired position balancing the force side to side. tie it to the siderail should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit. Also To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving. (CHMSL) located above the glass or above the rear If you need to. Do not tie the load check now and then to make sure the luggage and so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are cargo are still securely fastened. be sure it is securely locked into the siderail. After moving a crossrail. luggage carrier has a roller crossrail at the rear of the Use the crossrails only to keep the load from vehicle. slightly to be sure the latch snaps securely into place. Tighten the thumbscrews. supports. Move crossrail to desired position. 3. To move the crossrails. Tie the load to the capacity and loading. move the crossrails loading your vehicle. place the load in the area over the rear wheels (behind Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp the rear side door on SuburbanNukon XL Models). sliding. Slide the crossrail to To load cargo. 2-5% . Be sure the cargo is properly loaded. If your vehicle has the 271 option your vehicle’s Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports. tie the load to the bumpers. care the load.

pull the to strap cargo in and latch to access. You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you’re not using it. heavier items. To install the net. the way. When not using the tie downs. flip them down out of The net is not designed for larger. keep it from moving inside the vehicle. Your vehicle may be To open the utility compartment. Convenience Net You may have a convenience net in the rear of your vehicle to help keep small loads. downs in the rear cargo area that allow you To open the SuburbanNukon XL compartment. Then. 2-59 .Rear Storage Area Cargo Cover Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located Cargo Tie Downs in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the driver’s side trim panel. attach the hooks to the raised cargo tie downs. attach the cord loops to the button retainers in the side trim. press in on the release equipped with cargo tie latch and swing the compartment door open. like grocery bags. in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.

To open or close your sunroof. Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periods of time as debris may collect in the tracts. or other object is blocking the sunroof glass panel as it is closing. This will reset the memory and enable the front overhead console to express-open the glass the sunroof to function properly. To close the glass panel. To Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding do this. With the sunroof closed. the vent position which occurs when the sunroof is fully Press and release the rear side of the button located in tilted rearward. The sunshade will not close when the sunroof is open. the glass panel can be closed or opened. After the obstruction is removed. If the battery has been recharged. arm. See "Retained Accessory closed position. 2-60 . you may need to reprogram the sunroof. the ignition or the sunroof switch until the glass panel moves to a fully RAP needs to be active. the glass panel will stop at the obstruction. The glass will not be fully seated unless the button is held until the glass stops moving. disconnected or is not working. press the forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the vent position. and press again to move to Power" under Starting and Operating Your Vehicle. panel and sunshade.Sunroof The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you can pull forward to block sun rays. press and hold the front of the button. start the vehicle and press the forward side of sunroof. If a hand. Release.

throttle and brake pedals. Driver 1 or driver 2 corresponds to the memory buttons labeled land 2 on the driver’s door. lumbar. feature. A double driver’s door. 2-61 . do the following: Memory Seat 1. both of the outside mirrors. chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored. but press the other numbered memory control button. To repeat the procedure for a second driver. The settings for these features can be personalized for both driver 1 and driver 2. throttle and brake pedals. These buttons are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver’s seat. follow the preceding steps. both the driver’s and passenger’s outside mirror. Adjust the driver’s seat (including the seatback recliner.Vehicle Personalization To store your memory seat. throttle and brake pedals. Press and hold the 1 or 2 (for driver l o r 2) button are located on the of the memory control for three seconds. and If your vehicle has this the radio station presets to your preference. mirrors and radio presets. and side wing area). and the radio station presets. then the controls for the memory function 2.

If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter your vehicle. Select the desired driver number by pressing and can also be recalled when placing the key in the releasing the 1 or 2 button. The controls for this memory function are located on the driver’s door. a single chime will sound and the memory position will be recalled. do the following: The seat. Information Center (DIC). To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at any time. 1 or 2. then removing the key from the ignition will cause the seat to move to the exit position. The seat will move to ignition if programmed to do so through the Driver the stored memory position. The numbers on the back of the transmitters. A double chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored for the identified driver (1 or 2). do one of the following: Press the exit button on the memory control. throttle and brake pedal. mirror positions and the desired driver’s seat position when exiting/entering the radio station presets will be recalled if programmed vehicle. Or. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position. The seat position. the preset driver’s h This button is used to program and recall the seat. To use the seat exit position. both driver 1 and driver 2. can be personalized for to do so through the Driver Information Center (DIC). control for three seconds. throttle and brake pedals and mirror positions 1. correspond to the numbers on the memory controls. 2-62 .Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while Easy Exit Seat the vehicle is in PARK (P). press one of the memory buttons or power 3. if this feature is enabled (active) in the DIC. To store the seat exit position for driver 1 or 2. Press and hold the exit button of the memory seat controls. 2.

........................... 3................. 3......................... 3.................... ....37 Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data Tachometer .......20 Cruise Control Light .6 Brake SystemWarning Light ......... 3..........37 AM-FM Radio ....................................40 Other Warning Devices .31 DIC Operation and Displays ..17 Transmission Temperature Gage ............... 3..... 3-51 Rear Air Conditioning System ..3................................ ...... -3-37 Systems (RDS) ....................... ....... -3-44 Accessory Power Outlets ............... Gages and Indicators .....................42 Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever ....5 Voltmeter Gage ..........................................20 Four-Wheel-Drive Light ............... 3.52 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System DIC Warnings and Messages .. 3.......38 Radio with Cassette and CD ........ 3............13 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ........ 3..........3...........3.................................-3-6 Anti-Lock Brake System Tilt Wheel .............3... 3.......50 Dual Climate Control System ............... 3-71 Safety Belt Reminder Light ..... 3........... 3.............................. ........................................... Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview ......................... 3.........................4 Battery Warning Light ....................................... ... 3-74 Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator .........52 Heating System ........... .................43 Exterior Lamps ......70 Speedometer and Odometer .......................... ................ 3... 3......62 and Electronic Climate Controls ......7 Traction Off Light .................................70 Warning Lights.... 3-85 3.........4Q Hazard Warning Flashers ..................... 3-38 Radio with CD ...3.49 Climate Control System ..................... ..................................................... 3..... ..............................................35 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Instrument Panel Cluster ......... 3...................................... 3....18 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............44 Interior Lamps .......1 ... 3........ 3-51 Rear Air Conditioning and Driver Information Center (DIC) .. ......................... ..... 3-71 Air Bag Readiness Light .....................46 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ..................... 3.................................................... .... .......... ..................... 3...........3................ ............................41 Horn ..................... -3-36 Data Systems (RDS) ..................................... 3-6 Warning Light .......21 Tow/Haul Mode Light ... 3............................................50 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ..........................-3-24 Fuel Gage .......................................... 3.....3............... ..............30 Low Fuel Warning Light ...........19 Oil Pressure Gage ... 3.................. 3............. 3..................33 Audio System(s) ...................49 Climate Controls ............ .........3..........

3.........128 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................128 Understanding Radio Reception ................ 3.................. 3..............3......125 Chime Level Adjustment .127 Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 3-99 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ............................................................ 3-122 Cleaning the Video Screen .......................3-127 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ..........-3-128 DVD Distortion ...........................3-126 3-2 .... 3.. 3.......... Section 3 Instrument Panel Radio with Six-Disc CD ........ 3-127 Rear Seat Entertainment System .....................128 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .....................125 DAB Radio Antenna System ... 3.... 3......................................................113 Care of Your CD and DVD Player ..........124 Fixed Mast Antenna .......124 XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna System .......... 3.........

.

IA 0 m T1 0 I c I 0 .

Storage Area (If Equipped) and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off... Steering Wheel Control Buttons N.............. S.......... Center Instrument Panel Utility Block 0. Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever F... Lighter and Accessory Power Outlets also let police know you have a problem.Lamp Controls C...DomeLamp Override Button Hazard Warning Flashers B..... They Q. I... . Instrument Panel Fuse Block L. Comfort Control System K. J. Automatic Transfer Case/Stabilitrak@Mode Button (AWD Vehicles)/Traction Assist System (TAS) E. Ashtray T..... Tow/Haul Selector Button ....Glovebox 3-5 ......... Air Outlets D...HoodRelease M.. Audio System .......... ....... Instrument Panel Cluster G..... ........ Your front R.......A.-.. ShiftLever H.... ParkingBrakeRelease Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.. Tilt Wheel Lever P..

The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the lower left sideof the column. warn others. hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter your vehicle. Set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (I00m) behind your vehicle. Other Warning Devices To tilt the wheel. 3-6 . Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable If you carry reflective triangles. The hazard warning Tilt Wheel flasher is located at the top of the steering column. Horn To sound the horn. When the hazard warning flashers are on. your turn signals won't work. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in. you can use them to position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place. and even if the key isn't in. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. press the center pad on the steering wheel.

the lever will return automatically. just raise or lower the lever Windshield Wipers until the arrow starts to flash.Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever Turn and Lane-Change Signals The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. The lever will return by itself @ WindshieldWasher when you release it. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. To signal a turn. @ ' Cruise Control (If Equipped) If you move the lever all the way up or down. turn signal. The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: 00 TurnandLaneChangeSignals - EO HeadlampHigh/Low Beam Changer An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. and the arrow flashes at twice the normal rate. When the turn is finished. a signal bulb may For information on the exterior lamps. 3-7 . move the lever all the way up or down. Flash-to-Pass Feature To signal a lane change. see Exterior be burned out and other drivers may not see your Lamps on page 3-13 earlier in this section.

The closer to the top of the lever. Then release it. To change the headlamps from low to high beam Windshield Wipers or push the lever toward the instrument panel. Hold it there until the wipers start. The wipers will stop after one wipe. Turn Signal On Chime To use it. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. then let go. Turn the band to choose the delay time. For a single wiping cycle. check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse. It works even if your headlamps are off. They’ll stay on as turn signal. This feature allows you to use your high-beam See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-97.2 km).If a bulb is burned out. your (1. replace it to help avoid an Flash-To-Pass accident. a chime will sound at each flash of the high-beam headlamps will turn on. 3-8 . If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile If your headlamps are off or on low-beam. high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on. You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. this light on the You control the windshield wipers by turning the band instrument panel cluster with the wiper symbol on it. Release the lever to turn the high-beam Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer headlamps off. pull the turn signal lever toward you. pull the multifunction lever : Mist toward you. headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. To return to low-beam headlamps. move the turn signal long as you hold the lever toward you and the lever to the off position. To turn off the chime. also will be on. hold the band on mist longer. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn. 0: off When the high beams are on. If you want more wipes. turn the band to mist. the shorter the delay.

Windshield Washer There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. wipers. 3-9 . turn the band away Rear Window WasherNViper from you to the first solid band past the delay settings. turn the control to 0. windows. to the This control is located on second solid band past the delay settings. turn the control to 2. get new blades or blade inserts. If they’re frozen to the windshield. check the fluid level. turn the control to 1. Otherwise the If you can wash your windshield but not your rear washer fluid can form ice on the windshield. To turn the wiper off. However. short delayed wiping. push the paddle. the rear window In freezing weather. blocking your vision. To wash the window. press the knob. move the band to off. The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer. To stop the 1 the instrument panel. For high-speed wiping. turn the control to either The wipers will clear the window and then either 1 or 2. If your blades do become worn or damaged. until the windshield is warmed. To spray washer fluid on the windshield.For steady wiping at low speed. For stop or return to your preset speed. carefully loosen or thaw them. turn the band further. Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. For long delayed wiping. don’t use your washer washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer. To turn the rear wiper on.

0: off t: Resume/Accelerate w : Set If you apply your brakes. the cruise control will disengage. On such roads. fast I 25 mph (40 km/h). 3-10 . you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or Cruise control can be dangerous where more without keeping you can’t drive safelyat a steady speed. Cruise Cruise control can be dangerous on control does not work at speeds below about slippery roads. your foot on the So. and you could lose control. changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning. help on long trips. don’t use your cruise control on accelerator. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.Cruise Control With cruise control. This can really winding roads or inheavy traffic.

3-1 1 . This. If you continue to hold the switch at resume/accelerate. If you leave your cruise control on when you’re not using cruise. the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. there. Get up to the speed you want. So unless you want to go faster. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the Resuming a Set Speed cruise control switch off until you want to use Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed cruise control. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. 1. can move the cruise control switch from on to 3. of course. I Setting Cruise Control The cruise light on the instrument panel will illuminate when the cruise control is engaged. release it. You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay 4. disengages the cruise control. Move the cruise control switch to on. and then you apply the brake. you 2. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to. don’t hold the switch at resume/accelerate. Press in the set button at the end of the lever ana resume/accelerate briefly. But you don’t need to reset it.

Each time you do this. your Passing Another Vehicle While Using cruise control set speed memory is erased. button briefly. Of course. Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Move the cruise control switch to off. Each time you do this. applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Control Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N). Hold it there until you get upto the speed cruise control on steep hills. To increase your speed in very small amounts. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever. pedal. speed.cruise release it. you want. or Press and hold the set button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want.6 km/h) faster. control will automatically deactivate if road To slow down in very small amounts. 3-12 . When going up steep hills. andthen release the switch. load and the steepness of the Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher hills. press the set conditions cause Stabilitrak@to activate. Step lightly on the brake pedal. you’ll go Erasing Speed Memory about 1 mph (1. When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition. When you take your foot off the pedal.6 km/h) slower. There are four ways cruise control can be turned off: your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1. your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. movethe switch Ending Cruise Control to resume/acceleratebriefly.Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Using Cruise Control on Hills Control How well your cruise control will work on hills depends There are two ways to go to a higher speed: upon your speed. you may have to brake or shift to then release the button and the accelerator a lower gear to keep your speed down. Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. then If your vehicle has the Stabilitrak@ feature. Many Move the cruise switch from on to resume/ drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use accelerate. you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill.

Turn the control clockwise to operate the lamps. If you have headlamps. together with the following: 0 SidemarkerLamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights Roof Marker Lamps (If Equipped) The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel 50 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this position operates the exterior lamps. together with the previously listed lamps and lights. An indicator light will illuminate when this position is selected. The exterior lamp control has four positions: You can switch your headlamps from high to low-beam by pushing the turn signaVhigh-beam lever towards 0 (Off): Turning the control to this position turns off the instrument panel. off.Exterior Lamps AUTO (Automatic): Turning the control to this position puts the system into automatic headlamp mode. too: (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this position turns on the parking lamps. turns on the headlamps. An indicator light will illuminate when an electrical overload. 3-13 . your headlamps will flicker on and selected. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away if this happens. the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)and the automatic A circuit breaker protects your headlamps.

lights does not affect the system. To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor located system off. you should turn on the regular that driving under bridges or bright overhead street headlamp system when you need them. Make sure your instrumentpanel headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the brightness control is in the full bright position. your instrument panel cluster may not be as When it is dark enough outside. You can program this feature using the Driver Information Center. one minute for the automatic headlamp system to 3-14 . See ”Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later in this section for more information. or the system will be on You may be able to turn off your Automatic Headlamp whenever the ignition is on. in LOCK. it will take approximately back on. instrument panel lights. or your door is headlamp system will come on immediately. The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage. To disable the chime. turn the control to the off position. Once open. your automatic bright as usual. Be sure it is not covered. This is normal. During that delay. The radio lights will also be dim. on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille. heavy overcast Your headlamps will also stay on after you exit the weather or a tunnel. See normal brightness along with other lamps such as “Instrument Panel Brightness Control” under Interior the taillamps. System. parking lamps are manually turned on and your If you start your vehicle in a dark garage. the automatic ignition is off. See Driver Information Center (DIC) There is a delay in the transition between the daytime on page 3-52 and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so As with any vehicle. turn the light off then you leave the garage. ACCESSORY.Automatic Headlamp System change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. vehicle. sidemarker. The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when Lamps On Reminder the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or longer than the delay. parking lamps and the Lamps on page 3.17.

If your vehicle has fog lamps. use them for better vision The DRL system will come on when the following in foggy or misty conditions. the headlamps be on for your fog lamps to work. located on the left side of the instrument panel. the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps or the last chosen headlamp setting that was used. periods after dawn and before sunset. Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must When you turn the headlamp switch off. When it begins to get dark. only your DRL lamps will be on. the light sensor determines it is daytime and When the DRL are on. the exterior lamps control is AUTO.Daytime Running Lamps Shifting the transmission into PARK (P) will allow you to idle the vehicle with the DRL off. and your DRL lamps will illuminate. The taillamps. The DRL will stay Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for off until you shift the transmission out of PARK (P). but they can be especially helpful in the short United States. the automatic transmission is not in PARK (P). sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. conditions are met: The fog lamp button is the ignition is on. BRL can be helpful in many different driving This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the conditions. provided it is not dark outside. will go off. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either. others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. 3-15 . Fully functional Fog Lamps daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

When the switch wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof mounted lamp. 3-16 . pressing the switch will activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light near the switch. When the high beams go off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after you restart the vehicle. The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is turned off. Press the Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch button again to turn them off. the instrument panel near the fog lamps will come on again. fog lamps alone will not give off as much center to install an auxiliary roof lamp. comfort controls. If your vehicle has this feature. An indicator light will glow in the button when the fog lamps are on. This switch is located on The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam the center of the headlamps come on.Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on your headlamps. this switch includes wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service Remember. you will need to press the fog lamp button again. Pressing the switch again will i x n off the roof mounted lamp. light as your headlamps.

press the button located next to each lamp. turn the thumbwheel all the way up. To turn on the reading lamps. With exit lighting. G?: his feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights. Turn the thumbwheel up to return the radio display to full brightness when the headlamps or parking lamps are on. 3-17 . To turn them off. The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the headlamp control. not come on if the dome override button is pressed in. the interior lamps will come on when The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction you remove the key from the ignition. To turn on the dome lamps. Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel lights. the lamps will not come on. When the doors are opened. Entry Lighting Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature.Interior Lamps Front Reading Lamps Instrument Panel Brightness The reading lamps are located on the overhead console. If the dome override button is pressed in. The lights will you want. press the Exit Lighting button again. the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the out position.

*: You can use the dome override button. Dome Lamps Accessory Power Outlets The dome lamps will come on when you open a door. To return the lamps to automatic operation. or may have one accessory power outlet located near the cigarette lighter. press the button underhood lamps if they are left on for more than located next to the lamp. With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel. In this position. To turn the lamps on or off. located below the exterior lamps control. or to remain off. This will keep your cannot be adjusted. With the button in this position. press the button again and return it to the out position. control. all the way up. To turn the lamps off. The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the receptacle to the right of the accessory power outlet. With the button in this position. Battery Run-Down Protection Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other This feature shuts off the dome. reading. if equipped. glove box and locations. The lamps are fixed and 10 minutes when the ignition is off. battery from running down. to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when a door is opened. the dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open. the dome lamps will come on when you open a door. 3-18 . the dome lamps will remain on whether a door is opened or closed. press the button into the in position. Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets. located next to the exterior lamps electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio.

if equipped. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.To use the outlet. be sure to follow the Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your proper installation instructions included with the hand while it is heating. problem. working as they should. see your dealer for additional information on Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable the accessory power plugs. items into your ashtrays. damaging the Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory lighter and the heating element. 3-19 . back away from the heating element when it’s ready. When adding electrical equipment. This wouldn’t be covered by To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up. Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible The front ashtray is located near the center of the to the accessory power outlet and could result in instrument panel or on the front console. and never use anything let go. If you experience a Pull OR the ashtray door to open it. Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter always close the cover. Hot cigarettes or other Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to your smoking materials could ignite them. When not using it. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. Check with your dealer before To use the cigarette lighter. If you do. blown vehicle or adapter fuses. it will pop back out by itself. your warranty. That can make it overheat. that exceeds the amperage rating. causing vehicle can damageit or keep other things from a damaging fire. push it in all the way. lift the cover. When it’s ready. it won’t be able to equipment. and adding electrical equipment. plugs only.

adjusts the fan speed. the windshield defroster outlets and the side window defroster outlets.Climate Controls Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger Climate Control System area. vehicle. f. +?(Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets. Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery. 12 (Floor): This setting directs most of the air through Fan Knob the floor outlets. The air flow can be divided 0 (Off): If the fan is off. outside air will still enter the between floor and defrost depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings. side window defroster outlets and some through the floor outlets. and the rest of the air is divided between the windshield defroster outlets and the side The fan knob on the left side of the control panel window defroster outlets. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air. turn it counterclockwise. windshield defroster outlets. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air. outlets. 3 (Defog): Airflow is delivered through the floor To turn the fan off. To increase airflow.' (Vent): This setting directs the air through the instrument panel outlets. To decrease airflow. and will be directed based on the position of the mode knob. The temperature can also be adjusted 9 (Defrost): This setting directs most air through the using the temperature knob. turn the knob clockwise. turn the knob to the off position. The flow can I' 'I be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings. 3-20 .

cooling 2 (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument and ventilation for your vehicle. Recirculation cannot mode knob. select either the blend or defrost mode and increase fan speed.The Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to air-conditioning compressor will also come on when this direct the airflow inside of your vehicle. If of your vehicle more quickly. +? (Bi-Level): This mode directs haif of the air to the instrument panel vents. While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp. (Recirculation): The recirculation mode is used to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air inside Turn the knob to the off position to turn off the fan. The temperature can also be adjusted be used in floor. To clear the fog. blend or defrost modes. then directs most of the remaining air to the floor vents. Press this button to the knob is in off outside air will still enter the vehicle. Use this @ (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or mode to help prevent outside odors and/or dust counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. turn the recirculation mode on or off. mode is activated.Dual Climate Control System To change the current mode. 3-21 . Cooler air is directed to the upper vents and warmer air to the floor vents. The light on the and will be directed based on the position of the recirculation button will illuminate. A little air is directed toward the windshield and the side window vents. select one of the following: With this system you can control the heating. panel vents. An indicator using the temperature levers. on the button will light up. 4 2 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor vents with a little air directed to the windshield and the side window vents. flash three times and turn off when recirculation is selected in these modes.

with only a little air directed to the floor vents. windshield and the side window vents. The air the air-conditioning system on or off. Passenger’s Side: The lever on the right side of the Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to climate control panel is used to raise or lower the select one of the following modes: temperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging. This is (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the normal. )#t (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn +3 (Defog): This mode directs the air to the floor outlets. 3-22 . The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in defrost mode.Temperature Control Defogging and Defrosting Driver’s Side: The lever on the left side of the climate There are two modes to choose from to clear fog or control panel is used to raise or lower the temperature frost from your windshield. The system will begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the of your vehicle. engine performance when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and turns on again. frost from the windshield more quickly. This lever also the windows of fog or moisture and warm the adjusts the temperature to the center console outlets passengers. When the button is conditioning compressor will run automaticallyto pressed. windshield and the side window vents. Use the defrost mode to removefog or (if equipped). an indicator light will come on and the dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging. You may notice a slight change in defog mode. Use the defog mode to clear on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

Rear Window Defogger Outlet Adjustment The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass. Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle. you could cut or damage Move the louvers up or down. Use the air outlets located The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to in the center and on the remove fog from the rear window. Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the Notice. tape. to the defogger grid. keep vehicle license. Move the center louvers up or down to direct the airflow. Donot attach a temporary the most efficient airflow and temperature control. and the repairs wouldn’t be to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers. For covered by your warranty. The rear window defogger will automatically turn off several minutes after the button is pressed. a decal or anything similar the outlet in the fully opened position. An indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that the rear window defogger is activated. the floor or upward. Rear seat outlets can be used to adjust airflow toward either seating area. (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off. Pressing the button while the defogger is running can also turn off the defogger. side of your instrument panel to direct the airflow. If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this button will activate them. the rear window. Use the thumbwheel next the warming grid. If you do. 3-23 .

v (Fan): Press this button to increase or decrease the fan speed. reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. you can store and recall theclimate control settings for temperature. snow.Operation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice. memory seats. The settings can also be changed by pressing one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door. When adjustments are made. Check with your dealer before adding climate control system. This helps air to circulate throughout your f :L.. Adding outside equipment to the front of your vehicle. the climate control will adjust to the last the heating. may affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning If your vehicle is equipped with the dual automatic system. or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far better. air delivery mode.. etc.. and memory equipment to the outside of your vehicle. settings of the identified driver. the new settings are automatically saved for that driver. such as hood-air deflectors. and Dual Automatic Climate Control fan speed for two different drivers. Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. vehicle. mirrors. The personal choice settings recalled are determined by the transmitter System used to enter the vehicle. After the button with Your vehicle may have the optional dual automatic the unlock symbol on a remote keyless entry transmitter climate control system. 3-24 . cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. With this system you can control is pressed.

and will be directed to the floor. the automatic dual of the driver’s until the AUTO button is pressed and held climate control system display will show the driver for approximately four seconds. This system will stay in the selected mode until lower the temperature on the passenger’s side of the the mode button is pressed again. @* 4# (Mode): Press this button to manually select the air Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob delivery mode to the floor. The The display will show the temperature setting decreasing temperature can aiso be adjusted using either or increasing and an arrow pointing to the driver. During the five second status display the current mode and blower speed will be displayed. and passenger’s air temperature. The display will show the temperature button. The temperature can be adjusted A five second status display will indicate the even if the system is turned off. defrost button. If the temperature settings are not the same. or turned off. be changed by pressing the mode button. Once this knob is used. or windshield clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or outlets. An arrow pointing to the passenger’s side will display if both sides are set to the same temperature. If the passenger’s set temperature has not the air conditioning button to turn the system on when it been adjusted this knob controls both the driver’s is off. to the passenger. the AUTO button. the opposite side temperature setting will be displayed for an additional five seconds. the defrost button. The temperature knob. This direction can the temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle. set temperature and an arrow pointing to the driver‘s side. 3-25 . Outside air will still enter the vehicle. current mode. panel. Air setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing delivery mode can be adjusted while the system is off. the passenger’s temperature will remain independent Display: In the full AUTO mode. The temperature to the rear seat area is controlled by using this knob. or the AUTO vehicle. Press the up or down arrows on the temperature can be adjusted even if the system is fan switch. or the off button is pressed.0(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or lower control system.

The length of delay depends on operation and air inlet will be automatically the engine coolant temperature. If automatic mode: you choose the temperature setting of 60°F 1. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature. and the fan speed. the opposite side temperature top of the instrument panel near the windshield. the air inlet may automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle. If the driver and passenger’s temperature settings Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the are not the same. Turn the air delivery. Press the AUTO button. same as the driver’s press and hold the AUTO To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather. The light on the button will illuminate in recirculation. setting will be displayed for an additional five This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun seconds. the passenger’s set temperature. Choosing either maximum delivery mode and fan speed. To find your comfort setting. The air inlet will normally be set to outside air. To make the passenger’s temperature the load. the 20 minutes for the system to regulate. (15°C) the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting.Automatic Operation 2. maximum heat setting. If you choose the temperature When AUTO is selected. Pressing the fan controlled. system will delay turning on the fan until warm air When auto is selected. 40°F (4°C). Press the AUTO setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any button again within five seconds to display faster. the air conditioning is available. start with a 74°F AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is (23°C) temperature setting and allow about active the system will control the inside temperature. If it’s hot outside. The air conditioning compressor will run switch will override this delay and change the fanto when the outside temperature is over approximately a selected speed. the button for approximately four seconds. 3-26 . and also turns on your headlamps. the display will change to setting of 90°F (32°C) the system will remain at the show the current driver’s set temperature. driver’s or passenger’s side temperature knob Use the steps below to place the entire system in to adjust the temperature setting as necessary.

or panel vents. f. selected in the floor mode. used to limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle. This is helpful when you are trying to prevent If you press the mode button to select an air delivery outside odors and/or dust from entering your vehicle.' (Vent):This mode directs air to the instrument If you select recirculation while in defrost. floor vents. A little air is directed toward the the windows to fog while using the recirculation windshield and the side window vents. floor.Manual Operation '/i (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the To change the current setting. Some air also comes out of the defroster and following: side window vents. instrument panel vents. the light on the button will flash and go out to let you know this is not allowed. Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed. select defog or directed to the upper vents and warmer air to the front defrost mode. off. Use this mode to send air to the rear of the vehicle. select one of the floor vents. the system may cause the floor vents. defog. the display will change to show you the selected to help cool the air inside of your vehicle more quickly. air mode delivery. let you know that it is activated. then directs the remaining air to If the weather is cold and damp. The recirculation mode is button until the desired mode appears on the display. 3-27 . This is to prevent +2(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the windshield fogging. When the system is turned throughout your vehicle. When this button is pressed. The display will then show the When this mode is on. The recirculation button cannot be adjust the fan speed. inside air will recirculate current status of the system. ** &I (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the *# (Mode): Press this button to manually change the direction of the airflow in your vehicle. keep pressing the recirculation mode on or off. Cooler air is mode. the display will go blank after displaying the an indicator light in the button will also come on to current status of the system. Keep the area under the front seats A@ V (Fan): T ~ I S button allows you to manually free of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of the vehicle. or mode. If the windows do start to fog.

The systemwill automatically When the system is selected. decal or anything similar to the defogger grid. clear the windows of fog or moisture. An indicator light in the button When the air conditioning is selected or in AUTO will come on to let you know that the rear window mode. Use the defog mode to will activate them. This setting will deliver air to the floor and Do not attach a temporary vehicle license. Notice: Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you need Defogging and Defrosting additional warming time. this symbol will appear on the display. a windshield outlets. you could cut or damage the defogger and the or moisture. Use the front defrost button to defrost the front windshield. 3-28 . or help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Rear Window Defogger You may notice a slight change in engine performance The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass. the system will run the air conditioning defogger is activated. tape. your air conditioning compressor will automatically runto If you select air conditioning off while in front defrost. defogger on or off. automatically. % (Air Conditioning Off): When you turn the air (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window conditioning off. remove fog from the rear window. The rear window defogger will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed. press the button again. when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to turns on again.e A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to (Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button to manually turn the air-conditioning system on or off. If you +3(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fog do. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer. dehumidify the air inside of your vehicle. This is normal. defog mode the air conditioning off symbol will flash to let you know this is not allowed. Press the mode button to select this repairs would not be covered by your warranty. setting. You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or If you vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this button frost from your windshield. or in AUTO mode control the fan speed if you selectdefrost from AUTO the system will automatically begin to cool and mode. defrost the windshield.

. may affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system. or upward. The side of your instrument heater and defroster will work far better. Use the air outlets located in the center and on the or any other obstruction (such as leaves). . Move the louvers up or down.. reducing panel to direct the airflow.. Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. the floor. such as hood-air deflectors.Outlet Adjustment Operation Tips . If your vehicle is equipped with rear seat outlets they can be used to adjust airflow toward either seating area. the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. Move the center louver up or down to direct the airflow. keep the outlet in the fully opened position. 3-29 .. . Adding outside equipment to the front of your vehicle. Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle. Use the thumbwheel next to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers. snow.. Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. etc. For the most efficient airflow and temperature control.

turn it counterclockwise. To conditioner it has two rear air conditioning fan speed turn the fan off. To decrease If your vehicle is equipped with the optional rear air the flow of cooled air. One fan speed selector is located in the overhead console and the other is located in the To operate the rear system using the front control.Rear Air Conditioning System The knob has three speed positions. turn the knob to the off position. turn the knob to the fan position you want. first turn the front control to the rear vents. 3-30 . AUX A/C I I I Front Control Rear Control To increase and decrease the flow of cooled air to the To use the rear control. turn the knob to the fan speed you want. selectors. AUX position. To increase the flow of cooled air. turn the knob clockwise. the rear control can be used to increase and decrease the airflow. Then. just headliner above the second row seats.

To increase airflow. area. +g(Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the floor outlets Front Control as well as the console outlets. Turn the knob clockwise toward the read area for warmer air. If your vehicle is equipped with this system. The The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the system can be controlled from the front controls as well temperature of the air flowing into the passenger as the rear controls. To decrease airflow. Fan Knob (Floor): This setting directs most of the air through The fan knob on the left side of the control panel the floor outlets adjusts the fan speed.turn it counterclockwise. The flow can be The front control has three knobs that control airflow divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon speed. where the knob is placed between the settings. located on the front climate control panel also allows the driver to turn off the Heating System rear seat passenger seat controls from the front seat. temperature and airflow location. turn the knob to the off position. 2 (Vent): This setting directs the air through the console outlets. 2 Mode Knob 3 The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air. 3-31 . turn the knob clockwise.Rear Air Conditioning and 0 (Off): An off setting. To turn the fan off. there are controls located in the overhead console and on Temperature Knob the back of the console in the rear seat area.

Fan Knob +2 (Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the floor outlets The fan knob on the left side of the control panel as well as the instrument panel outlets. turn it counterclockwise. 3-32 . console outlets. Turn the knob clockwise toward the read area for warmer air. To increase airflow. The flow can adjusts the fan speed. Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery. turn the knob to the off position. upon where the knob is placed between the settings. temperature and airflow location. (Floor): This setting directs most of the air through 0 (Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn the rear the floor outlets seat comfort controls on or off. Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the so ' 2 temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air. To turn the fan off. To decrease airflow. Rear Controls The rear seat controls have three knobs that control fi (Vent): This setting directs the air through the airflow speed. turn the knob be divided between vent and floor outlets depending clockwise.

system can be controlled from the overhead controls or The system also AUTO settings that can automatically the rear controls. there are the control panel to increase or decrease the controls located in the overhead console and on temperature. temperature and airflow location. System and Electronic Climate To adjust the airflow speed turn the knob located on the left side of the control panel. Front Controls 3-33 .Rear Air Conditioning and Heating The overhead control has three knobs that control airflow speed. located on the overhead climate control panel also allows the driver to turn off the rear seat passenger seat controls from the front seat. To regulate airflow location adjust the right the back of the console in the rear seat area. To adjust the air Controls temperature turn the temperature knob on the center of If your vehicle is equipped with this system. The knob on the control panel. 0 (Off): An off setting. control the fan speed and/or mode of the air delivery to the rear seating area.

Rear Controls 3-34 . +2 (Mode): Press this button to select the air delivery. and AUTO mode. & (Temperature): Press this button up or down to increase or decrease the temperature setting. A 88 v (Fan): Press this button up or down to adjust the fan speed. and setting. The rear seat controls have the following settings: 6 (On/Off): Press this button to turn the rear seat comfort controls on or off.

So please get to know your warning lights and gages could also save you your warning lights and gages. Gages and Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. See problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages Indicators and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle. or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem. Your vehicle also has a driver information system that Warning lights come on when there may be or is a works along with the warning lights and gages. The pictures will help you When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on locate them. see in the details on the next few pages. or others from injury. 3-35 . youshould not be alarmed when this happens. some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. As you will Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-52. They’re a big help. This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. check the section Warning lights and gages can signal that something is that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause manual’s advice. Paying attention to costly . Waiting to do repairs can be an expensive repair or replacement. when you are driving.Warning Lights.and even dangerous. If you are familiar with this section.

.

Engine Hour Meter Display If the driver’s belt is already buckled.Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both Your tachometer displays the engine speed in miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). The safety belt light will Press the reset button to toggle between the trip also come on and stay on odometer and the regular odometer. or until the ignition is turned on. turn the ignition off. Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven. button for two seconds while the trip odometer is then it will flash for displayed will reset it. 3-37 . revolutions per minute (rpm). a chime will Trip Odometer come on for several seconds to remind people to The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle fasten their safety belts. To display the odometer reading with the ignition off. To display the hour meter. neither the chime The odometer can also display the number of hours the nor the light will come on. press and hold the reset button for at least four seconds. The hour meter will be displayed for up to 30 seconds. in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). unless the driver’s safety belt is has been driven since you last set the trip odometer already buckled. to zero. Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START. engine has run. press the reset button. several more. Holding the reset for several seconds.

for several seconds as a system check. malfunctions. This means the system is ready. Then the light should go out.Air Bag Readiness Light Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system panel cluster. and it will flash for a few seconds. The system check includes the air bag sensors.United States vehicle. the wiring and the crash sensing L and diagnostic module. the passenger air bag status indicator will light ON and OFF. Have your vehicle Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator serviced right away.Canada When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START. the air bag modules. your rearview mirror will havea passenger air bag status The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for indicator. your air bag system may not work properly. . the passenger sensing system (if equipped). see Air Bag Systems on page 7-68. or the symbol for on and off. If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving. 3-38 . For more information on the air bag system. This light will come on I when you start your Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator . The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. which shows the air bag symbol.

or either the on or off symbol means that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off to let you know the statusof the right front passenger’s the right front passenger’s frontal air bag. there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service. after several more seconds. or if there are no lights at all. A child in a something may be wrong with the air bag rear-facing child restraint can be seriously system. eair L-3 reac ess passenger sensing system has not turned off light ever come on together. the status indicator If the word OFF is lit on the air bag status indicator. passenger’s seat unless the air bag has been turned off. all status indicator lights passenger’s frontal air I J is enabled (may inflate).. If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger air bag status indicator. Passenger Sensing System on page 1-76 for more on this. after several seconds. This is because the back of person sitting in the right front passenger the rear-facing child restraint would be very seat may not have the protection of the close to the inflating airbag. Don’t use a frontal air bag. it means that the right front If.atora. including important safety information. it means that the :he _. inc. 3-39 . it will light either ON or OFF.. becausean adult-size air bag inflates.. remain on. See frontal air bag. If this ever happens. it means that the passenger’s frontal air bag. If the ON indicator comes on when you have a rear-facing child restraint installed in the right front passenger’s seat. have the vehicle injured or killed if the right front passenger’s serviced promptly. See ”Air Bag Readiness Light” rear-facing child restraint in the right front in the Index.Then.

of charge in DC volts. such as the radio and the air conditioner. If you must drive a short distance with this light displayed. operating range. The battery display will also stay on while the key is in RUN until the engine is started. Driving with this light displayed could drain low and high warning zones indicate the normal your battery. or some When the engine is running. it helps to turn off all your accessories. this gage problem with your charging shows your battery’s state system. Have it checked right condition of the charging system. If the light stays on after starting the engine it could indicate a problem with the generator drive belt. Readings between the away.Battery Warning Light Voltmeter Gage If this light is displayed When your engine is not when the engine is running. but the ignition is running. 3-40 . the gage shows the other charging system problem. you may have a in RUN.

a chime problem. will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). The light will ignition key to RUN. This condition is normal since the both parts working well. For good braking. You can only drive for a shorttime with the reading in either warning zone. allow the charging systemto create maximum power. BRAKE United States Canada Brake System Warning Light With the ignition on. though. you need extended period. If it doesn’t come on then. If you must drive.Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two large number of electrical accessories are operating in parts. have it flash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. turn off all unnecessary accessories. If one part isn’t working. this could be a brake problem. charging system is not able to provide full power If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there at engine idle. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. Have your brake system condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds inspected right away. the other part can still the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an work and stop you. the brake system warning light will This light should come on briefly when you turn the flash when you set the parking brake. 3-41 . Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. If you fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a try to drive with the parking brake engaged. As engine speeds are increased.

That’s normal. pull off the Anti-Lock Brake System road and stop carefully. It may take longer to stop. your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. have the vehicle towed for service. you still have brakes. If the light is still on. but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. or comes on when you’re driving. system.If the light comes on while you are driving. Driving with the brake system warning light problem. you will also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of a problem and each time the car is shut off and then restarted. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped If the light stays on. on can lead to an accident. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on. You will also hear a chime sound when the light is on steady. have it Your brake system may not be working fixed so it will be ready to properly if the brake system warning light is warn you if there is a on. Or. have the vehicle towed for service. In addition to both lights. carefully. the pedal may go closer to the Warning Light floor. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-41 earlier in this section. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. 3-42 . If the light doesn’t come on then. See Towing With the anti-lock brake Your Vehic‘ on page 4-53. this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds.

the system will turn off and the light will light is on. press the button again. see Traction Assist you if the system is turned off. The light will come on and stay on if the TAS . the light will come on and stay on to indicate that the traction system is off. move the shift lever Assist System. 0 If the Traction Assist System is affected by an there may be a problem with your Traction Assist anti-lock brake system. The light will go off a few seconds after the 0 If you turn the system off by pressing the TAS rough road conditions go away or when the vehicle comes to a complete stop. your driving accordingly. To turn the automatic require service. press the TAS off/on If the light doesn’t come on then. operation. 3-43 . To I If you have the Traction turn the system back on. the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust come on. or comes on when you’re driving. This is normal on/off button located to the left of the steering wheel. To turn the system back on. Have your vehicle serviced. the system may button.Traction Off Light If you move the shift lever to FIRST ( l ) . the light will come on and stay on. If the vehicle is driven over an extremely rough The traction off light may come on for the following road. the light when you turn the ignition should go off. the light should go off. System (TAS) on page 4-9. have it fixed so it will be there to warn engagement feature back on. If the light stays on. the light should go off. When this problem. This is normal operation. this light should come on briefly back to a position other than FIRST (1). page 4-9. automatic engagement feature has been turned off. the system will turn off and the light will come reasons: on. To turn the system on. See Traction Assist System (TAS) on to RUN. TAS or engine-related System and your vehicle may need service.

It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is working. See Engine Overheating on page 5-30. 3-44 . gage reaches the 260°F (1 25°C)mark. The normal or going up hills. it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity. it is normal for the temperature to operating range is from 100°F (38°C) to about fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. the gage When your ignition is on. If the 265°F (130°C). During a majority of the operation.Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Transmission Temperature Gage 7 7 United States Canada United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If you are pulling a load temperature of the transmission fluid. Your vehicle may be equipped with a transmission temperature gage. the gage shows the will read 210°F (100°C) or less.

to idle until the transmission temperature falls below 260°F (127°C). mode. the message center Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with the will display a TRANSMISSION HOT message and transmission temperature gage above the normal the transmission will enter a transmission protection operating range.At approximately 265°F (1 30°C). contact your nearest dealer or temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down. the Driver Low transmission fluid level lnformation Center will display a TRANS HOT IDLE ENG warning message. See Roadside If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures Assistance Program on page 7-6. Set the parking brake. see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5 for the proper transmission maintenance intervals. place Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary the transmission in PARK (P) and allow the engine transmission oil cooler (if equipped). the GM Roadside Assistance Center. shifting patterns. you may notice a change in the transmission covered under your warranty. 0 Towinga trailer See Driver lnformation Center(DlC) on page 3-52 for further information. on a frequent basis. 3-45 . When the transmission enters the protection This could lead to costly repairs that may not be mode. Pull the vehicle off the roadway High transmission fluid level when it is safe to do so. If the transmission continues to operate A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating above 265°F (13O"C). The transmission will return to normal The following situations can cause the transmission to shifting patterns when the transmission fluid temperature operate at higher temperatures: falls below 260°F (127°C). 0 Hot outside air temperatures If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of 0 Hauling a large or heavy load approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater. you can damage the transmission.

A misfire condition has been indicate that there is a problem and service is required. ignition and emission repairs not covered by yourwarranty. If the light doesn’t come on. designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. Light On Steady . your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.Malfunction Indicator Lamp Notice: Modifications made to the engine. This may prevent more your vehicle. 3-46 . monitors operation of the Modifications to these systems could lead to costly fuel.An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. transmission. A misfire increases vehicle emissions Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system and may damage the emission control system on before any problem is apparent. This light will also come on during a assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the malfunction in one of two ways: life of the vehicle. helping to produce a cleaner environment. This light should come on. The Check Engine light comes on to Light Flashing . your emission controls and service may be required. intake or fuel system of your Check Engine Light vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with other than those of thesame Tire Performance Your vehicle is equipped Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission with a computer which controls and may cause this light to come on. exhaust. after a while. This may control systems. have it Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to repaired. Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis light on. detected. also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. may not work as well. Dealer or qualified service center serious damage to your vehicle. as a check to show you it is working. This system is also diagnosis and service may be required. when the ignition is on and the engine is This system is called OBD II (On-Board not running.

The condition Turn the key off. fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? Avoidinghardaccelerations. the Light Is On Steady” following. your electrical system may be wet. The 0 Avoiding steep uphill grades. see “If should turn the light off. the Light Is On Steady” following. reduce the amount of been left off or improperly installed. A few driving trips should turn the light off. wait at least 10 seconds and restart will usually be corrected when the electrical system the engine. and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service. when it is safe to do so. making sure to fully install the cap. If the light remains on steady. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed If the light stops flashing and remains on steady. see “If dries out. follow the previous steps. 3-47 .If the Light is Flashing If the Light Is On Steady The following may prevent more serious damage to You may be able to correct the emission system your vehicle: malfunction by considering the following: Reducingvehiclespeed. Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? If the light continues to flash. reinstall the fuel cap. stop the vehicle. If the light is still flashing. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-9. diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has If you are towing a trailer. If so. If so. A loose or missing cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

You may notice this as stalling after start-up. designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. hesitation Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. see your dealer or qualified service and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical center to prepare the vehicle for inspection. Poor fuel quality will Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.Have you recently changed brands of fuel? Here are some things you need to know to help your If so. Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. The vehicle would be light to turn on. 3-48 . It will require at least battery has run down. See vehicle pass an inspection: Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. considered not ready for inspection. you have recently replaced your battery or if your change the fuel brand you use. misfiring. problems that may have developed.) emission control systems have not been completely This will be detected by the system and cause the diagnosed by the system. (These (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up. This may take several days If none of the above steps have made the light turn oft. If you have done this and your vehicle have your dealer or qualified service center check still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD the vehicle. The diagnostic system is one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. Your dealer has the proper test equipment system readiness. of routine driving. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. stalling when you put the vehicle into gear. Engine light is on or not working properly. This can happen if If you experience one or more of these conditions.

Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in Cruise Control Light kPa (kilopascals). by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure.17. outside whenever you set your temperature and oil viscosity. your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. See “Cruise low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.Oil Pressure Gage Dc t kc . You or others could be burned. See Oil Pressure Low under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-62 and Engine Oil on page 5. The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. 1 Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil United States Canada problems can be costly andis not covered by your warranty. J if theoilpressureis low. If you do. 3-49 . The cruise light comes on Oil pressure may vary with engine speed. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. Control’’ under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused on page 3-7. but readings above the cruise control. Check your oil as soon as possible.

Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting For more information. transfer case into four-wheel drive and the front axle engages. * Four-Wheel-Drive Light Tow/HauI Mode Light . The four-wheel drive indicator will light up when you shift a manual 7 This light is displayed whenthetow/haulmode has been activated. See Four-wheel Drive on page 2-28 for more information. 3-50 . see Towing a Trailer on is normal. page 4-59.

The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when you are starting the engine. At the gas station. 3-5 1 . When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-52. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage. For example. possible. See Fuel on page 5-5. tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank. the gage may have indicated the tank was half full. To turn it off. The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the ignition. It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. add fuel to the fuel tank. United States Canada Low Fuel Warning Light The fuel gage. but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. when the ignition is on. the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full. and you should get more fuel as soon as This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. The gage will first indicate empty before you are out or fuel.Fuel Gage Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage.

annual log and the timer.Driver Information Center (DIC) D (Select): This button resets certain functions and turns off or acknowledges messages on the DIC. above. Pressing the select button will acknowledge any current warning or service messages. are trip information. The DIC can display wheel buttons you will not have all of the features listed information such as the trip odometer. average fuel economy. DIC Operation and Displays The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. A (Trip Information): This button will display the The DIC has different modes which can be accessed odometer. personalization B (Fuel Information): This button will display the and select. 3-52 . If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering C (Personalization): This button will change personal wheel buttons not all of the features listed will be options available on your vehicle. The DIC display is located on the instrument panel If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering cluster above the steering wheel. hourmeter. available on your vehicle. business trip by pressing the four buttons on the DIC. and you will turn off. a warning message will appear on the display. or acknowledge DIC messages by using the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster. These buttons odometer. If a problem is detected. fuel information. personal trip odometer. instant fuel the following. economy and engine oil life. fuel economy and personalization features. After a short delay the DIC will display the current driver and the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. The button functions are detailed in current range.

This shows the ratio of getting for the personal trip based on current and business trip miles to annual miles as a percent. LOG and TIMER. e PERSONAL: XX.This shows the amount of fuel used for the personal trip. PERSONAL TRIP ON/OFF.Trip Information Button PERSONAL: AVG MPH .This shows the current Personal Trip distance traveled since the last reset for the business trip odometer in either miles or kilometers. e BUSINESS: XX MI .This shows how many miles per gallon of fuel your vehicle is BUSINESS: Yo ANNUAL . Use the trip information button to scroll through the SEASON ODOMETER.This shows the current e BUSINESS: AVG ECONOMY . Business Trip If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering If the BUSINESS TRIP is on (turn it on or off by wheel buttons you can select the trip information pressing the select button) you will also be able to scroll by pressing the trip odometer reset stem on the through the following: instrument panel cluster. PERSONAL: o/o ANNUAL .This shows the ratio of BUSINESS TRIP ON/OFF.This shows the vehicle’s average speed for the personal trip. BUSINESS: AVG MPH .This shows the amount through the following: of fuel used for the business trip.This shows the vehicle’s average speed for the business trip. ANNUAL personal trip miles to annual miles as a percent.This shows how distance traveled since the last reset for the many miles per gallon of fuel your vehicle is personal trip odometer in either miles or kilometers. getting for the business trip based on current and past driving conditions.X MPG . you will also be able to scroll and holding the trip odometer reset stem. If the PERSONAL TRIP is on (turn it on or off by pressing the select button) you will also be able to scroll e BUSINESS: XX.X MPG . HOURMETER. through more messages. e PERSONAL: XX MI . e PERSONAL: AVG ECONOMY . See Personal Trip and Business Trip next for more information. past driving conditions. If the personal trip and/or the business You can reset the personal trip odometer by pressing trip are set to ON. 3-53 .

to scroll to the annual log. been driven in either miles or kilometers. Press the select the reset stem or select button for four seconds. button. even if another display is being shown on the DIC. Pressing the To stop the counting of time. This will reset all of the information for the log shows the mileage accumulated since it was personal or business trip. The hourmeter shows the total number of hours the engine has run. or the trip odometer reset stem. or if your vehicle does not last reset. To reset the annual log. approximately two seconds. or the trip odometer reset stem. amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset (not including time the ignition is off). 59 minutes and reset step. The display will show the ignition cycle for the personal or business trip. The Press the trip information button. or the trip odometer reset stem for reset stem on the instrument panel cluster. The annual modes. To reset the timer to zero. You can also reset the PERSONAL: XX MI. while TIMER the display will show the distance traveled since the last is displayed to start the timer. Time will Season Odometer continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on. Pressing the reset stem on the instrument cluster will also display the hourmeter after the season odometer is displayed. This shows the total distance the vehicle has back to zero. press the select button reset stem located on the instrument cluster with briefly while TIMER is displayed. press and hold the select Hourmeter button. while they are displayed by pressing Timer the reset stem on the cluster. Press the trip button to scroll to the hourmeter. press the select button. while TIMER is displayed.To reset the personal or business trip information. or the trip odometer timer will record up to 99 hours. press and hold the have the DIC steering wheel control buttons. or BUSINESS: XX MI. If you press and hold The DIC can be used as a stopwatch. the vehicle off will also display the season odometer. or the reset stem on the instrument panel cluster. do Annual Log the following: press and hold select button for two seconds while in one of the personal or business trip Press the trip button. until SEASON ODOMETER appears on 59 seconds (995959) after which the display will roll the display. 3-54 .

As your button while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. Also. Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE Fuel Range appears in the display.ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel economy. If the average fuel economy is not reset. Instant fuel economy is how many miles the GM Oil Life SystemTM. Average fuel economy is how many affect the oil. Also. sure to check your oil level often. Press and hold the select button while AVG. average fuel economy. 3-55 . the fuel level is low. It to display the remaining distance you can drive will show 100% when the system is reset after an without refueling. driving conditions change. this data is gradually updated. To The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is reset the Oil Life System press and hold the select an average of recent driving conditions. See Engine Oil on page 5. Always reset the engine oil life after and oil change.17.Fuel Information Button Instant Fuel Economy Use the fuel information button to scroll through the Press the fuel information button until INST appears in range. So. Average fuel economy will then be calculated starting from that point. The display will show LOW if schedule consistent with your driving conditions. The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule Average Fuel Economy in this manual. the oil change reminder does not miles per gallon your vehicle is getting based on current measure how much oil you have in your engine. It will alert you to change your oil on a fuel remaining in the tank. the oil change reminder will not Press the fuel information button until AVG appears in detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may the display. The instant fuel economy cannot be reset. Fuel range cannot be reset. be and past driving conditions. The GM Oil Life SystemTM Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. per gallon your vehicle is at the particular moment If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering in time. wheel control buttons you will not be able to display the GM Oil Life SystemTM fuel information. It’s based on fuel economy and the oil change. instant fuel economy and the display. it will be continually updated each time you drive.

by pressing the appropriate memory button 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door. Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices: AUTOMATICUNLOCKING ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps SEATPOSITIONRECALL will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is PERIMETERLIGHTING active. WARNING TYPE appears in the display. Press the personalization button DISPLAYLANGUAGE to scroll through the following personalization features. only the options available will be unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or displayed on your DIC. HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT CURB VIEWASSIST 3-56 .Personalization Button EASYEXITSEAT You can program certain features to a preferred setting DISPLAYUNITS (E/M) for up to two people. If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering wheel buttons you will not have any of these Alarm Warning Type personalization options except for DISPLAY LANGUAGE. See DISPLAY LANGUAGE later in this Press the personalization button until ALARM section for more information. To select your personalization for alarm warning type. REMOTELOCKFEEDBACK ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm REMOTEUNLOCKFEEDBACK warning on activation. All of the personalization options may not be available The driver’s preferences are recalled by pressing the on your vehicle. press the ALARMWARNINGTYPE select button while ALARM WARNING TYPE is AUTOMATICLOCKING displayed on the DIC.

18. Pressing the select button will scroll through the UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will following choices: unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. Choose one of the four options and press the LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED: The doors will lock personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for select it and move on to the next feature. press the select button while AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING is Automatic Locking displayed on the DIC. personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. unlocked automatically. LOCK DOORS MANUALLY: The doors will not UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK: The driver’s door will be unlocked when the vehicle is shifted in PARK (P). To select Theft-Deterrenton page 2.ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when Choose one of the three options and press the the alarm is active. To select your UNLOCK ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will personalization for automatic locking. For more three seconds. For more ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash information on automatic door locks see Programmable when the alarm is active. your personalization for automatic unlocking. Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices: Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC LOCKING appears in the display. button while AUTOMATIC LOCKING is displayed on the DIC. LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK (default): The doors UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY: The doors will not be will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P). be locked automatically. For more Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC information on alarm warning type. 3-57 . Automatic Doors Locks. see Content UNLOCKING appears in the display. information on automatic door locks see Programmable Automatic Door Locks. Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to Automatic Unlocking select it and move on to the next feature. press the select unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE: The memory Choose on of the two options and press the seat position you saved will be recalled when you personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry select it and move on to the next feature.Seat Position Recall Perimeter Lighting (. when you unlock the vehicle door panel. For more information on seat position recall see Memory Seat on page 2-61. if it memory button 1 or 2 is pressed on the driver’s is dark enough outside. Pressing the select button will scroll through the the following choices: following choices: SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF (default): The memory PERIMETER LIGHTING ON (default): The headlamps seat position you saved will only be recalled when the and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds. transmitter. To select your LIGHTING appears in the display. with the remote keyless entry transmitter. press the select button while SEAT POSITION RECALL is displayed button while PERIMETER LIGHTING is displayed on the on the DIC. 3-58 . To select your personalization for seat position recall. Choose one of the three options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. Press the personalization button until SEAT POSITION Press the personalization button until PERIMETER RECALL appears on the display. press the select personalization for perimeter lighting. SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN: The memory PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF: The perimeter lights will seat position you saved will be recalled when you not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the put the key in the ignition. Pressing the select button will scroll through DIC. remote keyless entry transmitter.

the select button will scroll through the following choices: Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices: LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter flash each time you press the button with the unlock and the horn will chirp the second time you press the symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter. press the select button while REMOTE entry transmitter. unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the the unlock button.Remote Lock Feedback Remote Unlock Feedback Press the personalization button until REMOTE LOCK Press the personalization button until REMOTE FEEDBACK appears in the display. lock button. second time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter. To select your UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display. Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to Choose one of the four options and press the select it and move on to the next feature. UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback lamps will flash each time you press the button with the when locking the vehicle. press the select button while REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter. To select personalization for the feedback you will receive when your personalization for the feedback you will receive locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless transmitter. personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. 2-59 . second time you press the button with the iock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Pressing UNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback when unlocking the vehicle.

Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to Choose one of the seven options and press the select it and move on to the next feature.Headlamps on at Exit Curb View Assist Press the personalization button until HEADLAMPS ON Press the personalization button until CURB VIEW AT EXIT appears in the display. 3-60 . press the select button button while CURB VIEW ASSIST is displayed on while HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is displayed on the DIC. If you choose off. To select your ASSIST appears in the display. Pressing the select button will scroll through the DIC. HEADLAMPSDELAY OFF CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’s The amount of time you choose will be the amount of outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off is shifted into REVERSE (R). the headlamps will turn off as soon as you turn off the vehicle. the vehicle. Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices: the following choices: CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will HEADLAMPSDELAY: 10 SEC (default) be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into HEADLAMPSDELAY: 20 SEC REVERSE (R). HEADLAMPSDELAY: 40 SEC CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted HEADLAMPSDELAY: 60 SEC into REVERSE (R). HEADLAMPSDELAY: 120 SEC CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror will HEADLAMPSDELAY: 180 SEC be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). see Curb View Assist select it and move on to the next feature. For more personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to information on curb view assist. To select your personalization for how long the headlamps will stay on personalization for curb view assist. Mirrors in the Index. press the select when you turn off the vehicle.

as long as you are in the season Display Units (ENG/MET) odometer mode. For more information on the seat position exit see Memory Seat You can also scroll through the different languages by on page 2-61. For example. distance in miles and fuel Press the personalization button until EASY EXIT SEAT economy in miles per gallon. the driver’s door panel is pressed. To select your personalization for seat position exit. Pressing the select button SEAT POSITION EXIT ON: The driver’s seat will move will scroll through the following languages: to the exit position when the key is removed from the ignition. SEAT POSITION EXIT OFF (default): The driver’s seat Display Language will move to the exit position when the exit button on To select your personalization for display language. all information will be displayed in English units. To select English or metric.Easy Exit Seat If you choose English. pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds. personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to press the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is select it. 0 English Choose one of the two options and press the French personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to 0 Spanish select it and move on to the next feature. press the select button while DISPLAY LANGUAGE is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select button will scroll through the following choices: select it and end out of the personalization options. Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices: UNITS:ENGLISH UNITS:METRIC 3-61 . Press the personalization button until DISPLAY UNITS Choose one of the three options and press the appears in the display. displayed on the DIC. press the select button while EASY Choose one of the two options and press the EXIT SEAT is displayed on the BIG. appears in the display.

This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to be changed. be sure to reset the The select button is used to reset certain functions and CHANGE ENGINE OIL message. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages messages that can be displayed and some information in their particular language. English will be in English. The select button also toggles through the options available in each personalization menu. LOW COOLANT LEVEL this button will reset the trip odometers. When you see the language that you would like. These want or understand. press and hold the personalization messages require action before they can be removed button and the trip information button at the same from the DIC display. The following are the possible time.If you accidentally choose a language that you don’t from the display because they are more urgent. and toggle through the If the engine coolant level is low. this message the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and will appear in the DIC. to Change under Engine Oil on page 5-17. If there is more than one message safe temperature. CHANGE ENGINE OIL The DIC will then display the information in the language you chose. Adding coolant will clear the in. DIC Warnings and Messages ENGINE COOLANT HOT Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify If the cooling system temperature gets hot. Some messages may not require immediate temperature. For example. about them. release both buttons. action but you should press the select button to acknowledge that you received the message and clear it 3-62 . This message will clear when the that needs to be displayed they will appear one after coolant temperature drops to safe operating another. turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message. Stop the vehicle and let the that some action may be needed by the driver to engine idle in PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach a correct the condition. this message will languages you can select the DIC to display information appear on the DIC. Select Button When you change the engine oil. See Engine Oil. French will be in French and so on. When turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC display. message.

Have the electrical the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe system checked as soon as possible. Driving with this the DIC and you will hear a chime. Have a qualified vehicle as soon as safelypossible and do notoperate technician inspect the system for problems. this message will appear in message will appear on the DIC. Restart the vehicle and check for the message See Engine Overheating on page 5-30 for further on the DIC display. this message will be If there is a problem with the air bag system. this This message is displayed when the cooling system message will be displayed on the DIC. Pressing it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been the select button will acknowledge this message corrected. If this message temperature gets too hot andthe engine further enters appears. this displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. OIL PRESSURE LOW SERVICE AIRBAG If low oil pressure levels occur. stop as soon as possible and turn off the the engine coolant protection mode. or appears again when you begin driving. your vehicle serviced. If the message is still displayed. Pressing the damage. from the DIC display. Check your oil as soon as possible and have and clear it from the DIC display. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM REDUCED ENGINE POWER If there is a problem with the brake system. information. 3-63 . Stop the message will be displayed on the DIC. Stop and turn off problem could drain your battery. vehicle. the brake system needs service. this temperatures for operation.ENGINE OVERHEATED BATTERY NOT CHARGING If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe If the battery is not charging during operation. This message will clear when the engine select button will acknowledge this message and clear it has cooled to a safe operating temperature.

If this message properly if the SERVICE BRAKE BOOSTER appears. Restart the vehicle and check for the message If the brake system warning light is also on. If the message is still displayed. SERVICE 4 WHEEL STEER If a problem occurs with the 4 wheel steer system. theevent of a vacuum loss.SERVICE BRAKE BOOSTER (Continued If your vehicle has vaccum assist power brakes. but the supplemental brake In assist system may not operate properly. See “Brake System Warning Light”in the Index. you still have brakes. vehicle. the four wheel you should have the vehicle towed for service. you may not have vacuum power assist for braking. pedal will be harder to push andit will take If the message is displayed immediately after starting longer to stop. this Your brake system may not be \ rking message will appear on the DIC. If the brake system warning light isn’t on. stop as soon as possible. possible. Have the brake system serviced as soon as See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-41. If you continue to drive with the vehicle or the message appears while driving. your Supplemental Brake Assist system needs service. this message displayed it can lead to a crash. on the DIC display. and turn off the message is displayed. steer system needs service.The brake CAUTION: (Continued) 3-64 . or appears again when you begin driving. this message will be displayed on the DIC when there is a problem with the Supplemental Brake Assist system.

Pressing the select button will or appears again when you begin driving. Move the turn signaVmultifunction lever to the off position. 3-65 . stop as soon as possible and turn off the will hear a chime. If the to stop. the four wheel acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC drive system needs service. SERVICE RIDE CONTROL REDUCED BRAKE POWER If a problem occurs with the suspension system.2 km). this may not notice any difference in the operation of message will appear on the display and you will your brakes. Turn the vehicle off and check the vehicle. this If your vehicle has vacuum assist power brakes. If the message is still displayed.SERVICE 4WD REAR ACCESS OPEN If a problem occurs with the four wheel drive system If the liftgate is open while the ignition is in RUN. This indicates that the TURN SIGNAL ON Supplemental Brake Assist system is working to maintain braking power. this message will appear on the DIC. Restart the vehicle and check for the message liftgate. when you apply or release the brake pedal even if your foot is not on the brake pedal. You may also hear a motor running and feel a message is still displayed. If you are braking lightly. you If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1. on the DIC display. or appears again when you slight vibration in the brake pedal or steering wheel begin driving. the ride control needs service. If this message message will be displayed and you may notice that the appears turn off the vehicle. hear a chime. Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display. If this message message will appear on the DIC display and you appears. this this message will appear on the DIC. display. Restart the vehicle and brake pedal is harder to push and it will take longer check for the message on the DIC display. Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.

If you will take longer to stop. see Brake System Warning Light in theIndex. However.You should have the vehicle towed for service.This message may also be displayed for brief periods if you are driving at higher elevations and are pumping your brakes or braking hard. Your brake system may ne--Je working FUEL LEVEL LOW properly if the REDUCED BRAKE POWER If the fuel level is low. or if needs service. Also. it can lead to an accident. this message will appear on the message is displayed. if the message does not clear. harder to push andit will take longer to stop. See Brake System Warning continue to drive with thismessage displayed Light on page 3-4 1. The message may clear after you’ve lifted your foot from the accelerator pedal an allowed the vehicle to coast in gear or after you If the message is no longer displayedafter you have driven down to a lower elevation. require that the brake system be serviced. Pressing the select button will acknowledge and stop carefully. there notice that the brake pedal is harder to push and it is a problem with your brake system. If this message comes DIC and you will hear a chime. if the message is still displayed. you can normal operation of your brake system and does not continue driving. I CAUTION: (Continued) 3-66 . The brake pedal will be this message and clear it from the DIC display. This is a have pulled off the road and stopped. Refuel as soon as on and stays on while driving.pull off the road possible. While the message is displayed you will it comes on again when youare driving. your brake system However.

you can damage the transmission. the appear on the DIC. When the transmission fluid temperature the select button will clear this message from the DIC returns to normal. You may need to let the vehicle cool or When the transmission enters the protection mode. displayed. this message will appear transmission TRANS FLUID HOT message on the DIC. This Pressing the select button will acknowledge this could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered message and clear it from the DIC display. Check and oil level and correct it as message center will display this message. the display will turn off and the display. Once the problem is corrected. necessary. For more information see Traction Assist Hauling a large or heavy load System (TAS) on page 4-9 Low transmission fluid level High transmission fluid level Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary transmission oil cooler. pressing patterns. this message will If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.CHECK OIL LEVEL TRANSMISSION HOT If the oil level in the vehicle is low. the traction Hot outside air temperatures control system will activate and this message will appear on the DIC. CHECK WASHER FLUID Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with the if the washer fluid level is low. y ~ u warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message may notice a change in the transmission shifting will clear. 3-67 . under your warranty. The following situations can cause the transmission to TRACTION ACTIVE operate at higher temperatures: When the traction control system has detected that any Towing a trailer of the vehicle’s wheels are spinning. transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.

3-68 . Pressing the select from the DIC display. Pressing PASSENGER DOOR AJAR the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display. Check to see if the If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed. and close the door again. RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR Stop and turn off the vehicle. and close the door again. If the driver’s door is not fully closed. button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display. this on a frequent basis. for obstacles.this message still appears on the DIC. If the passenger’s door is not fully closed. obstacles. see Scheduled Maintenance message will appear on the display and you will hear a on page 6-5 for the proper transmission maintenance chime. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. Stop and turn off the vehicle. this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime. The battery needs button will acknowledge this message and clear it to be replaced in the transmitter. this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle. If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed. Check to see if the If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low. check the door for obstacles. Pressing the select message will appear on the DIC. and close the door again. this message still appears on the DIC. check the door intervals. and close the door again. check the door for obstacles. Pressing the select message will appear on the display and you will hear button will acknowledge this message and clear it a chime. check the door for from the DIC display. Pressing the DRIVER DOOR AJAR select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display.A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down. RFA # BATTERY LOW Stop and turn off the vehicle. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.

Mud. if an engine or vehicle the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message is on. Also. or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions and require more wheel spin. an extended period of time. The vehicle is safe to drive. 3-69 . ice or snow however. needs service.SERVICE STABILITY STABILITY SYS DISABLED If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY message. turn off the engine. When due to driving conditions. The a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road. You should Stabilitrak@on. However. mud. you related problem has been detected. it The STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will turn on means there may be a problem with your when you press the Stabilitrak@button. caused the message to be displayed are no longer present.If you see this message try to reset stability control has been automatically disabled. if your vehicle gets stuck in sand. If the SERVICE STABILITY message still enhancement system. and the vehicle should continue to steer in the direction you want to go. the message will appear. as it might if you hit See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-47. you should normally leave comes on. message could be displayed if the stability system takes When the system activates. then start the wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability engine again). you should turn Stabilitrak@off see your dealer for sewice. There are four conditions that can cause this the DIC. It means that an advanced computer-controlled message to appear. To limit the system (stop. Ice or Snow on page 4-50. so reduce your speed and drive accordingly. One condition is overheating. See If You Are Stuck: In STABILITY SYS ACTIVE Sand. or when the Stabilitrak@ system. which system has come on to help your vehicle continue to could occur if Stabilitrak@activates continuously for go in the direction in which you’re steering. This is normal. To turn the Stabilitrak@system back on press the Stabilitrak@button You may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on again. your vehicle is just starting to spin. you may hear a noise or longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks feel a vibration in the brake pedal. it means there is a problem. The message will also be Stabilitrak@activates when the computer senses that displayed if the brake system warning light is on. you do not have the benefit of Stabilitrak@. and you want to “rock your vehicle to attempt to free it. The system is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult driving situations by making the most of The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that whatever road conditions will permit.

and Radio Data Systems (RDS) even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operationof sound equipment that Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds. it’s very important to do it properly. Press and hold the So. The time may be set with the ignition on covering mobile radio and telephone units.Audio System(s) Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained Accessory Power (RAP).CB radio. Then press the HR (down) arrow until the correct has been added improperly. If you can. Added sound equipment may Setting the Time for Radios without interfere with the operationof your vehicle’s engine. Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it. Delphi Electronics radio or other systems. check with MIN (up) arrow until the correct minute appears on your dealer and be sure to check federal rules the display. Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and to give years of listening pleasure.like a tape player. 3-70 . You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. or off. add what you want.be sure you can Positions on page 2-21. hour appears on the display. With RAP. mobile See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under lgnition telephone or two-way radio . you can play your Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to audio system even after the ignition is turned off. your vehicle . before adding sound equipment.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. 3-71 . RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display between time and radio station frequency. at the Playing the Radio same time. Once you have VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to tuned to an RDS broadcast station. press and hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until RDS TIME appears on the display. NO UPDAT will appear on the PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on display instead. The time may be set with the ignition on or off. for another 2 seconds. few minutes for your time to update. it may take a decrease volume. and off. To accept this time. If the time is not available from the station. press and hold the hour and minute buttons. To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS) information. Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour appears on the display. Press and hold the minute button until the correct minute appears on the display. Time display is available with the ignition turned off.Setting the Time for Radios with AM-FM Radio Radio Data Systems (RDS) Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes.

play for a few seconds and flash the station frequency. Whenever you arrows for two seconds until you hear a beep. press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps. 4. 3-72 . Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning presets. then go on to the next station. Time display is your favorite stations. FM1 or FM2. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM. play for a few seconds and flash you set will return. 3. Press and hold one of the six numbered To scan stations. The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the pushbuttons. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning. 1. following steps: TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations. To scan preset stations. six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the available with the ignition turned off. Tune in the desired station. This radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal. press and hold one of the SEEK pushbuttons until you hear a beep. the station frequency. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. then go on to the next preset station.Finding a Station Setting Preset Stations AM FM: Press this button to switch the display between The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to time and radio station frequency. Turn the radio on. 5. 4 SEEK D : Press the right or the left arrow to seek to the next or to the previous station and stay there. Press AM FM to select AM. the station will go to a station. 2. The radio press that numbered pushbutton.

L and a zero BAS or TRE. press and release AUDIO until calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. end out of audio by waiting and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you for the display to change to the time display. two seconds until you hear a beep. Then press hear a beep. B and a zero or T To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls and a zero will appear on the display. Then press and hold the up or the down rear speakers. If CAL BAL appears on the display. 3-73 . Then press and hold the up or the AUDIO repeatedly until BAS or TRE appears on down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the the display. Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Radio Messages AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right CAL (Calibrated): Your audio system has been and the left speakers. CEN will appear on the display. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than or F and a zero will appear on the display. press and release on the display. end out of audio by waiting To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls for the display to change to the time display. LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the Theftlock@system has locked up. If a station is weak or To adjust balance or fade to the middle position. Your vehicle must be returned to the dealership for service. you may want to decrease the treble. CEN will appear on the display. BAL or FAD. press and release AUDIO until FAD appears AUDIO: To adjust bass and treble. Then press to the middle position. be returned to the dealership for service. arrow to increase or to decrease. selecr noisy. Then press and hold the up appears on the display it means that your radio has not or the down arrow to move the sound toward the right been configured properly for your vehicle and must or the left speakers. Then press and hold AUDIO for more To adjust bass or treble to the middle position. to the middle position.Setting the Tone (Bassnreble) To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers. and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you Fade may not be available if you have a regular cab hear a beep. select than two seconds until you hear a beep. model.

Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming. sports.xmradio. receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies. RDS stations may also provide the time of day. contact the radio station. XMTMRadio Satellite Service (USA Only): XMTMis a Base Radio Shown. contact XMTM at www. the station name or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency. broadcast RDS information.S. For more equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). display messages from radio stations. In rare cases.com or features are available for use only on FM stations that call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). XMTM system. RDS information. a program type (PTY) for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast. If this happens. your vehicle will have six Base@ amplified provides digital quality audio and text information. Bose@Similar continental U.Radio with CD This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. 3-74 . speakers. talk and children’s programming. A service fee is Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is required in order to receive the XMTM service. including song title and artist name. and seek to stations with traffic announcements. based satellite radio service that offers 100 coast to coast channels including music. While you are tuned to an RDS station. a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose@audio news.

Digital Audio Broadcast transmission services are currently available in Toronto. name of the program (if available). push this knob the display. Set the volume at the desired level. categories of information: Artist. push this knob to change what appears on information consult the GM Canada website at the display while using RDS. artist name. related to the current song or channel. By pressing and releasing this knob. if your radio is equipped with make up for road and wind noise as you drive. In fringe between radio station frequency and time. your dealer or call are station name. your audio system will adjust automatically to For DAB (Canada only. Category or PTY. emergency use automatic volume. then hold the knob volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. if your radio is equipped with XMTMSatellite Radio Service). Time display areas signals may be interrupted by buildings. The radio will produce one beep you drive. automatic volume increases the volume as and selected display will now be the default. PTY and the 1-800-263-3777. Ottawa.com. announcements and more. AVOL will appear on To change the default on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more until you see the display you want. The volume 3-75 . RDS station frequency. you may retrieve four different VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease volume. Then as for two seconds. weather. Song Title. push this knob while in PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on XM mode to retrieve various pieces of information and off. If you don’t want to title. pushing this knob switches the display between channel name and PTY name.gmcanada. other obstructions. NONE will appear on the display if the radio digital quality audio and text information including song cannot determine the vehicle speed. AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic volume. Press this button to select LOW. and Windsor. traffic. Vancouver. select OFF. DISP (Display): Push this knob to switch the display Montreal. necessary to overcome noise at any speed. trees and is available with the ignition turned off. For current DAB coverage and other For RDS. DAB). Additional services will be added in the future.Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada Only): DAB level should always sound the same to you as you is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers drive. Channel NumberKhannel Name. Playing the Radio For XMTM (USAonly. MEDIUM or HIGH. The display options www.

XM2 (USA only. The radio will display the letter The radio will scan only to stations that are in the L with a number next to it (1 through 23). scanning. The radio will scan to a station. 3-76 . It may also take a To scan preset stations. Each L number selected band and only to those with a strong signal. play for a few seconds. Press one of the arrows again to stop DAB frequency range. The radio will produce one TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations. Turning this knob will tune up or scanning. The display will arrows again or one of the pushbuttons to stop show your selections. Press one of the another station or to another frequency. produce two beeps. play for a few For DAB (Canada only.Finding a Station 4 SEEK b : Press the right or the left arrow to seek to the next or to the previous station and stay there. if your radio is equipped with seconds. DAB2 selected band and only to those with a strong signal. BAND: Press this button to switch between AM. refers to a frequency and there can be multiple stations contained in one frequency. press and hold one of the few seconds. The radio will scan only to preset stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal. arrows for more than four seconds. if your radio is equipped with DAB). the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the displayed. (Canada only. tune down the range. or XMI. The radio will scan to the first preset Depending on how many stations are within a frequency. FM. FM2. station. 4 SCAN b : Press and hold one of the arrows for more than two seconds. SCAN will be DAB). The radiowill for that frequency to gather all of the stations. then go on to the next with every tune up or down. you may be tuning to preset station. once you have tuned to a frequency. beep. then go on to the next station. if your radio is equipped The radio will seek only to stations that are in the with XMTMSatellite Radio Service) or DABl. The display will show your selection. PSCN will be displayed.

jazz. The radio 1. if your radio is equipped with the XM Satellite show the bass. weak or noisy. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle 3. Press BAND to select AM. midrange. push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone 4. The radio will produce equalization that best suits the type of station one beep and display ALL with the level display in you are listening to. Press AUTO EQ to choose the bass and treble or speaker control is displayed. the middle position. to choose bass and treble equalization settings Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton. XM2. talk. six XMI and six XM2 (USA knob to increase or to decrease. position. or XMI. DAB2. BASS. you may want to decrease the treble. by performing the following steps: To adjust the bass. The radio will produce one beep. push and hold the AUDIO knob. until CUSTOM 6. Turn the six FMI and six FM2. or DABl. midrange or treble level. and treble to the middle position. You can set up to 30 stations (six AM.Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (BassTTreble) The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your AUDIO: Press and release the AUDIO knob until favorite stations. appears. Turn the radio on. your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK. middle position. If a station is Radio Service) or six DAB1 and six DAB2 (Canada only. 3-77 . If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system. if your radio is equipped with DAB). 5. MID or TREB appears on the display. rock and station you set will return and the bass and treble classical stations. press and release the AUDIO knob. The display will only. pop. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton. Tune in the desired station. To return the bass and treble to the custom mode. the designed for country/western. will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the 2. Press and hold one of the six numbered AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button pushbuttons. FM1 or FM2.

category and the category is displayed. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the display. The balance and fade SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within will be adjusted to the middle position and the display a category by performing the following: will show the speaker balance. the radio produces one beep. press either Finding a PTY Station SCAN arrow. To select and find a desired PTY perform the following: 1. Once the desired category is displayed. If the category is not To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers. and the radio will begin scanning within your chosen category. press the SEEK TYPE button once. position. toward the front or the rear speakers. push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed. Press wither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning. TYPE and a PTY will To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle appear on the display. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. The radio will produce 2.Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) 3. NONE To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position. press the SEEK TYPE button twice push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears to display the category and then to go to another on the display. 3-78 . Select a category by turning the P-TYPE LIST knob. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE one beep and display ALL with the level display in LIST knob. will appear on the display and the radio will return to push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until the last station you were listening to. (RDS. the middle position. Turn the knob to move the 4. 2. If you want to go to another station within that sound toward the right or the left speakers. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display. XMTMand DAB) 4. displayed. Turn the knob to move the sound station. If the radio cannot find the desired program type. left speakers. 3. Once the desired category is displayed. press the SEEK TYPE button or one of the SEEK arrows to AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the take you to the category’s first station. 1.

To scroll through the appear on the display. 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered message has been displayed. etc. Press this button to see the message. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. These buttons have factory PTY presets. press the INFO button repeatedly. the PTY you by pressing the INFO button until a new message is set will return. ALERT! will appear on the display. TYPE and a PTY will appear every three seconds. Press BAND to select FMI or FM2. This feature is not supported by Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) all RDS stations. If the whole message is not displayed. call in performing the following steps: phone numbers. play will stop during the announcement. AF OFF or a compact disc is playing. the information symbol will appear on the favorite PTYs. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. parts of it will 2. the display with each press. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob.BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency RDS and DAB Messages allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type. Press and hold BAND for two ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. the information symbol will disappear from the display until another new pushbuttons until you hear a beep. The old message can be displayed press that numbered pushbutton. display. AF ON When an alert announcement comes on the current will appear on the display. The You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMI and six FM2) by message may display the artist and song title. ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system. 1. Whenever you message is received. A new group of words will appear on 3. 3-79 . message at your own speed. The radio may switch to radio station. Once the complete 4. even if the volume is muted seconds to turn alternate frequency off. The radio will not switch to is playing. If the compact disc player will appear on the display. INFO (Information): If the current station has a The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your message. received or a different station is tuned to. Press and hold BAND again for two hear the announcement. You will stronger stations. other stations. seconds to turn alternate frequency on. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY. This function does not apply for XMTMor DAB.

DAB station. or TRAF will appear on the display. Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the NO INFO will be displayed. you will hear it. or DAB station. For DAB (Canada only. when the TRAF button is pressed. NO the radio will resume play of the CD. If the current tuned station does not a station that broadcasts traffic announcements. If no station is found. If the compact displayed when the radio has not been calibrated disc player was being used. TRAF will announcement comes on the station that was found. You must return to the the announcement. or XMTM. When a traffic announcement comes on the current station or on a related network station. You must return checks the current frequency for traffic support. When the radio finds a station that will stop. The radio will seek to a station that TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic broadcasts traffic announcements. When the radio finds announcements. If no station is found. Press the TRAF button. play of a CD. or XMTM. DAB only THEFTLOCK@ system has locked up. the radio will seek to a station that does. NO TRAF will appear on the display. if your radio is equipped with DAB). Radio Messages even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing.When a message is not available from an station. DAB does not LOCKED: This message is displayed when the seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. comes on you will hear it. play will stop during properly for the vehicle. The traffic symbol and TRAF will appear on the CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is display while the announcement plays. When atraffic broadcasts traffic announcements. This function does not apply to XMTMSatellite Radio Service. dealership for service. TRAF will appear on the display. it will stop. to the dealership for service. appear on the display and when a traffic announcement you will hear it. 3-80 . it broadcast traffic announcements. When the traffic announcement is over.

by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). These channels. This message should disappear shortly. indicates content with explicit language. No Signal Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly. XMTMRadio Messages Radio Display Action Condition Required Message XL (Explicit Language XL on the radio display. Tune to another channel. you may need to choose another station for that preset button. CH Unavail Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. or any others. the signal should return. customer’s request. and encryption code no action is required. his time on this 3-81 . Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. but you are in a location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into an open area. can be blocked at a Channels) after the channel name. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. Updating Updating The encryption code in your receiver is being updated. If this station was one of your presets. No action is needed. I Loading XM Acquiring channel audio Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and (after 4 second delay) text data. available Tune to another station.

Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the category you the chosen category selected. ~~ No Info No TextAnformational No text or informational messages are available at this message available time on this channel. 3-82 . (should only be if you may have a receiver fault. you will see this message (channel 0) alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. Your system is working properly. Your system is working properly. Consult with your retail location. Your system is working properly. your receiver may have a fault. Radio ID Radio ID label If you tune to channel 0. hardware failure) Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time. XM Locked The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. check with the servicing facility. Unknown Radio ID not known If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0. XMTMRadio Messages (cont’d) I I Radio Display Condition Action Required Message No Info Category Name not No category information is available at this time on this available channel. If you receive this message after having your vehicle serviced. This label is needed to activate your service. For security purposes?XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. Consult with your dealer.

Press and hold it The display will show the CD symbol. TUNE or the eject symbol. the tracks in random. 3-83 . If either arrow is held or pressed more than once. label side up. The pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing. rather than sequential. once. 4 SEEK b : Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or to the previous track. If pressed when the current more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the track has been playing for more than eight seconds. times the normal playing speed. Press and hold this 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six previous track if the current track has been playing times the normal playing speed. will appear on the display. Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track. number will appear on the display when each track TRACK and the track numberwill appear on the starts to play. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than off random play. and the track number will appear on the display. Release it to play the passage. Press this pushbutton again to turn display. Press and hold this Insert a disc partway into the slot.Playing a Compact Disc 3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track. the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD. If you want for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the to insert a compact disc with the ignition off. normal playing speed. RDM T and the track 2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track. RDM OFF will appear on the display. see “Compact Disc 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to Messages” later in this section. The display will show ET and the elapsed time. first press normal playing speed. If 6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once. If an error appears on the display. RDM ON player will continue moving back through the disc. order. Press and hold it for for less than eight seconds. Release it to play the passage. TRACK The display will show ET and the elapsed time. it will go to the beginning of the current track. the player will continue moving forward through the disc. advance quickly within a track.

DlSP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing. the display (track or elapsed time). BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a If the CD is not playing correctly. 3-84 . scratched. you see the display you want. If so. to stop scanning. wet or upside down. it could be for one of the following feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the disc. To change the default on normal. for any other reason. try again. then hold the knob for two seconds. push the knob until The disc is dirty. reasons: Press either SCAN arrow again. CD is playing. When the road becomes smoother. the disc should play. contact your dealer. the disc should play. When the temperature returns to will appear on the display. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first. (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD corrected. You’re driving on a very rough road. when listening to the radio. The radio will produce one beep and The air is very humid. Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. wait about an hour and selected display will now be the default. ET and the elapsed time It’s very hot. press and hold either Compact Disc Messages SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. try a known good CD.4 SCAN b : To scan the disc. Use this If the disc comes out. The disc will stop but remain in the player.

Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming. talk and children’s programming. For more equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). and seek to stations with traffic announcements. In rare cases. contact XMTMat www.S. a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. XMTM system. a program type (PTY) for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast. based satellite radio service that offers 100 coast to coast channels including music. RDS information. receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies. broadcast RDS information. including song title and artist name. While you are tuned to an RDS station.com or features are available for use only on FM stations that call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). display messages from radio stations. If this happens. contact the radio station. sports. RDS stations may also provide the time of day. BoseB Similar continental U. XMTMRadio Satellite Service (USA Only): XMTMis a Base Radio Shown. A service fee is Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is required in order to receive the XMTMservice. your vehicle will have six Base@ amplified provides digital quality audio and text information.xmradio. speakers. the station name or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency. 3-85 . If your vehicle is equipped with the Base@ audio news.Radio with Cassette and CD This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available.

automatic volume increases the volume as and selected display will now be the default.gmcanada. announcements and more. By pressing and VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to releasing this knob. push this knob the display. If you don’t want to title. traffic. trees and is available with the ignition turned off. your dealer or call are station name. RDS station frequency. emergency use automatic volume. name of the program (if available). then hold the knob volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. categories of information: Artist. DlSP (Display): Push this knob to switch the display Montreal. Additional services will be added in the future. DAB). Press this button to select LOW. The volume 3-86 . if your radio is equipped with to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Then as for two seconds. Set the volume at the desired level. In fringe between radio station frequency and time. Digital Audio Broadcast transmission services are currently available in Toronto. you may retrieve four different decrease volume. Channel Number/Channel Name. select OFF. NONE will appear on the display if the radio digital quality audio and text information including song cannot determine the vehicle speed. weather. PTY and the 1-800-263-3777. other obstructions. push this knob to change what appears on information consult the GM Canada website at the display while using RDS. pushing this knob switches the display between channel name and PTY name. artist name. For current DAB coverage and other For RDS. Time display areas signals may be interrupted by buildings. Category or PTY. related to the current song or channel.if your radio is equipped with XMTMSatellite Radio Service). and Windsor. AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic volume. your audio system adjusts automatically For DAB (Canada only.com. The display options www. push this knob while in PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on XM mode to retrieve various pieces of information and off. MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on To change the default on the display. Playing the Radio For XMTM (USA only.Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada Only): DAB level should always sound the same to you as you is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers drive. necessary to overcome noise at any speed. Each higher setting will allow for more until you see the display you want. The radio will produce one beep you drive. Vancouver. Ottawa. Song Title.

Press one of the arrows again to stop DAB). if your radio is equipped with displayed. The radio will for that frequency to gather all of the stations. produce two beeps. 3-87 . The display will arrows again or one of the pushbuttons to stop show your selections. The radio will scan only to preset stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal. The display will show your selection. The radio will scan to the first preset Depending on how many stations are withina frequency. SCAN will be For DAB (Canada only. station. scanning. The radio will display the letter The radio will scan only to stations that are in the L with a number next to it (1 through 23). BAND: Press this button to switch between AM. play for a few seconds. if your radio is equipped with DAB). DAB frequency range. The radio will produce one TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations. It may also take a To scan preset stations. press and hold one of the few seconds. arrows for more than four seconds. DAB2 selected band and only to those with a strong signal. once you have tuned to a frequency. The radio will scan to a station. then go on to the next with every tune up or down.Finding a Station 4 SEEK b : Press the right or the left arrow to seek to the next or to the previous station and stay there. (Canada only. then go on to the next station. play for a few seconds. 4 SCAN b : Press and hold one of the arrows for more than two seconds. FM2. if your radio is equipped The radio will seek only to stations that are in the with XMTM Satellite Radio Service) or DAB1. Each L number selected band and only to those with a strong signal. the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the scanning. Press one of the another station or to another frequency. Turning this knob will tune up or tune down the range. XM2 (USA only. beep. FM. refers to a frequency and there can be multiple stations contained in one frequency. PSCN will be displayed. or XM1. you may be tuning to preset station.

Tune in the desired station. or DAB1. equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton. DAB2. Press AUTO EQ to choose the bass and treble or speaker control is displayed. Press and hold one of the six numbered AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep. The radio 1. XM2. If a station is Radio Service) or six DAB1 and six DAB2 (Canada only. push and hold the AUDIO knob. BASS. will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the 2. To return the bass and treble to the custom mode. if your radio is equipped with the XM Satellite show the bass. the middle position. and treble to the middle position. until CUSTOM 6.Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (BasdTreble) The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your AUDIO: Press and release the AUDIO knob until favorite stations.jazz. you may want to decrease the treble. midrange. your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK. 3-88 . rock and station you set will return and the bass and treble classical stations. by performing the following steps: To adjust the bass. weak or noisy. MID. Turn the six FMI and six FM2. 5 . talk. six XMI and six XM2 (USA knob to increase or to decrease. Press BAND to select AM. or XMI. FMI or FM2. or TREB appears on the display. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. or treble level. pop. midrange. if your radio is equipped with DAB). You can set up to 30 stations (six AM. appears. the designed for country/western. middle position. position. press and release the AUDIO knob. If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system. to choose bass and treble equalization settings Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton. Turn the radio on. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle 3. push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone 4. The radio will produce equalization that best suits the type of station one beep and display ALL with the level display in you are listening to. The display will only.

TYPE and a PTY will To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle appear on the display. NONE To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position. push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed. left speakers. will appear on the display and the radio will return to push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until the last station you were listening to. XMTMand DAB) 4. To select and find a desired PTY perform the following: 1. The radio will produce 2. a category by performing the following: 1. The balance and fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the display SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within will show the speaker balance. displayed. toward the front or the rear speakers. Press wither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning. 3-89 . 2. position. push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display. If the radio cannot find the desired program type. If you want to go to another station within that sound toward the right or the left speakers. Once the desired category is displayed. press the SEEK TYPE button twice push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears to display the category and then to go to another on the display. (RDS. press the SEEK TYPE button or one of the SEEK arrows to AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the take you to the category’s first station. press the SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is not To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers.Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) 3. the radio produces one beep. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound station. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE LIST knob. and the radio will begin scanning within your chosen category. press either Finding a PTY Station SCAN arrow. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. Turn the knob to move the 4. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE one beep and display ALL with the level display in LIST knob. category and the category is displayed. 3. Once the desired category is displayed. the middle position.

even if the volume is muted seconds to turn alternate frequency off. This feature is not supported by all RDS stations. The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite PTYs. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency RDS and DAB Messages allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type. To scroll through the 3. seconds to turn alternate frequency on. call in 1. AF OFF or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. Press and hold BAND for two ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. Whenever you message has been displayed. If the will appear on the display. AF ON When an alert announcement comes on the current will appear on the display. Press BAND to select FMI or FM2. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until a new message is 5. A new group of words will appear on 4. the PTY you will disappear from the display until another new set will return. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY will If the whole message is not displayed. Once the complete pushbuttons until you hear a beep. You will stronger stations. press the INFO button repeatedly. phone numbers. received or a different station is tuned to. the information symbol press that numbered pushbutton. Press and hold one of the six numbered the display with each press. message is received. ALERT! will appear on the display. etc. 3-90 . play will other stations. These buttons have factory PTY presets. 2. The radio may switch to radio station. stop during the announcement. the information symbol will appear on the performing the following steps: display. Press and hold BAND again for two hear the announcement. This function does not apply for XMTM or DAB. The radio will not switch to cassette tape or compact disc player is playing. Press this button to see the message. INFO (Information): If the current station has a You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMI and six FM2) by message. The message may display the artist and song title. message at your own speed. appear every three seconds. ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) broadcast system. parts of it will appear on the display.

the radio will seek to a station that does. you will hear it. NO Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the INFO will be displayed. If no station is found. If no station is found. dealership for service. it will stop.or DAB station. If the current tuned station does not radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic broadcast traffic announcements. TRAF will appear on the broadcasts traffic announcements. the radio will resume play TRAF will appear on the display. If the compact displayed when the radio has not been calibrated disc player was being used. TRAF will display. play of a cassette. Radio Messages even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing. DAB only THEFTLOCK@ system haslocked up. When the announcements. The radio will seek to a station TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic that broadcasts traffic announcements. You must return to the the announcement. When a traffic announcement comes on the current station or on a related network station. to the dealership for service. NO TRAF will appear on the display. you will hear it. or XMTM. Press the TRAF button. You must return checks the current frequency for traffic support. of the cassette. When a traffic announcement comes on appear on the display and when a traffic announcement the station that was found. play will stop during properly for the vehicle. The traffic symbol and TRAFwill appear on the CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is display while the announcement plays. orDAB station. if your radio is equipped with DAB). When the radio finds a station that announcements.When a message is not available from a station. This function does not apply to XMTMSatellite Radio Service. For DAB (Canada only. or XMTM. 3-91 . NO traffic announcement is over. CD. DAB does not LOCKED: This message is displayed when the seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. it will stop. When the comes on you will hear it. CD. when the TRAF button is pressed.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and (after 4 second delay) text data. When you move into an open area. This message should disappear shortly. customer’s request. or any others. No action is needed. CH Off Air CH Unavail No info No Info 3-92 . and code no action is required. No Signal Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly. the signal should return. XMTMRadio Messages Radio Display Condition Action Required Message ~~~~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~ ~ XL (Explicit Language XL on the radio display. can be blocked at a Channels) after the channel name. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. Updating Updating encryption The encryption code in your receiver is being updated. but you are in a location that is blocking the XM signal. by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). indicates content with explicit language. These channels.

you may have a receiver fault. For security purposes. Radio ID Radio ID label If you tune to channel 0. Unknown io ID not knownIfyou receive this messagewhenyou tune to channel 0. check with the servicing facility. you will see this message (channel 0) alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. XMTMRadio Messages (cont’d) Radio Display Condition Action Required Message No Info XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. This label is needed to activate your service. Consult with your dealer. Consult with your retail 3-93 . If you receive this message after having your vehicle serviced. XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. eiver may have a fault.

selection on the tape if the current selection has been playing for less than three seconds. If an error appears on the display. If the ignition is on. If pressed when the 3-94 . use the VOL.Playing a Cassette Tape current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds. AUDIO and silence between each selection for next to work. face to the right. the tape is playing. it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are the beginning of the current selection. tape rapidly. The radio will play while the tape reverses. remove the tape and start over. depending upon up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. A SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is while the cassette player is in the previous mode. The longer side with the tape visible should will go to the beginning of the current selection. the Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the tape may not be in squarely. If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off. display. but the radio is off. If pressed when the current longer than that are so thin they may not work well in selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds. inserted. Press the eject symbol to number of selections to be searched back. the player will continue moving forward through thetape. The display Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of tape. SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. Tapes the position on the tape. 2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds of While the tape is playing. seconds of silence between each selection for previous You may select stations during reverse operation to work. it this player. Press it again to return to playing speed. If you press the pushbutton more than once. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound. first SEEK and a positive number will appear on the press the eject symbol or DISP. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous by using the TUNE and SEEK. the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. The 1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least three station frequency and REV will appear on the display. up to -9. see “Cassette Tape 3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the Messages” later in this section.

The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape 4 SCAN b : To scan the tape. If the arrow is held or pressed CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If CHK TAPE appears on more than once. stations during forward operation by using TUNE and SEEK. You may select radio for future listening. loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first. the tape won’t play because of one of or backward through the tape. the player will continue moving forward the radio display. Use this counterclockwise with a pencil. or negative number will appear on the display. (Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when it is playing or to eject atape when it is not playing. while the tape advances. Press either SCAN arrow tape may be damaged and should not be used in again. Press this button to switch again to return to playing speed. The tape will stop but remain in the to get the cassette out. 3-95 .4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a tape when quickly to another part of the tape. Try a new tape to make sure your player least three seconds of silence between each selection is working properly. The tape is broken. for scan to work. to stop scanning. Press this pushbutton listening to the radio. The radio will play between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. Try a new tape. Remove the tape. your the current side of the tape. press and hold either hubs. Attempt tape is playing. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a 0 The tape is wrapped around the tape head. The station frequency The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the and FWD will appear on the display. Turn the tape over feature to listen to 10 seconds of each selection on and repeat. Cassette tapes may be the tape. Eject may 5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of be activated with the radio off. 4 SEEK b : The right arrow is the same as the Cassette Tape Messages NEXT pushbutton. Your tape must have at the player. player. Hold the tape with the SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN open end down and try to turn the right hub appears on the display and you hear a beep. SEEK and a positive the following errors. and the left arrow is the same as the PREV pushbutton. If the hubs do not turn easily. Try a new tape.

the player will continue moving forward through the disc. TRACK following steps: and the track number will appear on the display. To activate the bypass feature. The override feature will remain active until the eject symbol is pressed. see “Compact Disc Messages” later in this section. 4. track has been playing for more than eight seconds. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. the Playing a Compact Disc cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. player will continue moving back through the disc. 2. Turn the ignition on. corrected. label side up. 3. feature is active. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than tape symbol on the display will flash.126. 3-96 . contact your dealer. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once. first press If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be DlSP or the eject symbol.CLEAN: If this message appears on the display. the 1. Turn the radio off. of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3. indicating the once. 2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track. If pressed when the current feature on your tape player. If you want to insert a compact disc with the ignition off. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five TRACK and the track number will appear on the seconds. If an error appears on the display. It will still play tapes. CD Adapter Kits 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit previous track if the current track has been playing with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass for less than eight seconds. The radio will display READY and the display. but you should clean it as soon as possible to Insert a disc partway into the slot. It will power up the radio and begin playing. The display will show the CD symbol. perform the it will go to the beginning of the current track. See Care player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing. The prevent damage to the tapes and player.

4 SEEK b : Press the left arrow to go to the start (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is of the current or to the previous track. Press the right playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. to stop scanning. Press and hold it feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the disc. If either may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. starts to play. button is pressed first. 3-97 . Press and hold this the display (track or elapsed time). Press this pushbutton again toturn The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the off random play.3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to 4 SCAN b : To scan the disc. RDM T and the track listening to the radio. normal playing speed. order. the player will may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this continue moving backward orforward through the CD. To change the default on advance quickly within a track. for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the Press either SCAN arrow again. Use this times the normal playing speed. The CD will stop but remain in the player. Press and hold it for for two seconds. 6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random. press and hold either reverse quickly within a track. Press this button to switch number will appear on the display when each track between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. ET and the elapsed time 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to will appear on the display. DlSP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing. Eject arrow to go to the start of the next track. Press and hold this SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six appears on the display and you hear a beep. normal playing speed. RDM OFF will appear on the display. The display will show ET and the elapsed time. then hold the knob times the normal playing speed. RDM ON TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a tape when will appear on the display. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. radio for future listening. The radio will produce one beep and more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the selected display will now be the default. Release it to play the passage. Release it to play the passage. rather than sequential. The display will show ET and the elapsed time. push the knob until pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six you see the display you want. CDs arrow is held or pressed more then once.

To stop listening to The air is very humid.Compact Disc Messages Listening to a DVD If the disc comes out. for any other reason. If your vehicle has this You’re driving on a very rough road. If so. current radio source will stop and the DVD sound will come through the speakers. When the RSE system is turned off. press the TAPE DISC normal. wait about an hour and the DVD. available and can be listened through your vehicles It’s very hot. button until RSE appears on the radio display. source that you were listening to. When the road system and a DVD is playing. tape or a CD is loaded. to select a different source. the DVD symbol If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be will go off of the radio display and the radio will display RSE OFF. it could be for one of the following Your vehicle may have an overhead Rear Seat reasons: Entertainment (RSE) System. the DVD symbol will appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is becomes smoother the disc should play. if a cassette try again. To listen to the DVD. try a known good CD. When the temperature returns to speakers. scratched. contact your dealer. The radio will return to the last radio corrected. wet or upside down. press the TAPE DISC button. 3-98 . the disc should play. or press the BAND button If the CD is not playing correctly. The The disc is dirty.

talk and children’s programming. If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose@audio news. your vehicle will have six Base@ amplified provides digital quality audio and text information. a program type (PTY) for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast. speakers.S. receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies. A service fee is Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is required in order to receive the XMTMservice. RDS information. RDS stations may also provide the time of day. 3-99 . sports. Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming. and e seek to stations with traffic announcements.xmradio. Bos. XMTM system. including song title and artist name.com or features are available for use only on FM stations that call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). broadcast RDS information. In rare cases. the station name or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency. XMTMRadio Satellite Service (USA Only): XMTMis a Base Radio Shown. contact XMTMat www. For more equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). display messages from radio stations. contact the radio station. a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. based satellite radio service that offers 100 coast to coast channels including music. If this happens. Similar continental U.Radio with Six-Disc CD This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. While you are tuned to an RDS station.

VOLUME: Turn the knob to increase or to decrease volume. push this knob while in Playing the Radio XMTM modeto retrieve various pieces of information related to the current song or channel. If you don’t want to use automatic areas signals may be interrupted by buildings. you may retrieve four different and off. automatic volume increases announcements and more. Each higher setting will digital quality audio and text information including song allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle title. if your radio is equipped with DAB).gmcanada. and Windsor. your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for To change the default on the display. then hold the knob until the display flashes. emergency speeds. The selected display will now be the default. your dealer or call the time.com. With this feature. Channel NumbedChannel Name. For current DAB coverage and other between the radio station frequency and the time. Category or PTY. pushing this knob switches the display between AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a channel name and PTY name. as you drive. other obstructions. Then. information consult the GM Canada website at Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display www. Song Title. For XMTM (USA only. Additional services will be added RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display in the future. artist name. Vancouver. The volume level should always sound the same Montreal. MED or MAX. trees and volume.Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada Only): DAB Set the volume at the desired level. categories of information: Artist. By pushing and PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on releasing this knob. as necessary. Ottawa.if your radio is equipped with XMTMSatellite Radio Service). traffic. feature called automatic volume. speed. Press this button to is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers select MIN. 3-100 . 1-800-263-3777. until you see the display you want. In fringe to you as you drive. to overcome noise at any transmission services are currently available in Toronto. select OFF. push this knob road and wind noise as you drive. For DAB (Canada only. Digital Audio Broadcast the volume. weather.

if your radio is equipped The radio will seek only to stations that are in the with XMTMSatellite Radio Service) or DABI. once you have tuned to a next preset station. XM2 (USA only. or XM1. The display will show your selection. k SCAN >I : Press and hold either SCAN arrow for two seconds until SC appears on the display and TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations. DAB2 selected band and only to those with a strong signal. The selected band and only to those with a strong signal. 3-1 01 . Press For DAB (Canada only. You will hear a double beep. you hear a beep. number refers to a frequency and there can be The radio will go to a preset station stored on your multiple stations contained in one frequency. DAB). Each L appear on the display. if your radio is equipped with DAB). BAND: Press this button to switch between AM. FM. if your radio is equipped with either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning. It may also pushbuttons. you may be The radio will scan only to stations that are in the tuning to another station or to another frequency. for that frequency to gather all of the stations. to stop scanning presets. display will show your selections. The radio will go to a station. The radio will display the arrow for more than four seconds. with every tune up or down. then go on to the take a few seconds.Finding a Station k SEEK >I : Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there. PRESET SCAN will letter L with a number next to it (1 through 23). play for a few seconds. then go on to the next station. the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the DAB frequency range. (Canada only. Depending on how many stations are within a frequency. Turning this knob will tune up To scan preset stations. press and hold either SCAN or tune down the range. Press either SCAN arrow again frequency. play for a few seconds. FM2.

push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone 3. 2. Tune in the desired station. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. You can set up to 30 stations (six AM. MID or favorite stations.Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (Bassnreble) The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position. DAB2. if your radio is equipped with the XMTMSatellite want to decrease the treble. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization. If a station is weak or noisy. 3-102 . midrange and treble press that numbered pushbutton. and adjust the display level to zero. The radio will produce 4. jazz. 5. or DABI. selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton. if your radio is equipped with DAB). FM1 or FM2. MID or TREB and push and hold the AUDIO knob. Whenever you to choose between bass. or XM1. six XMl and six XM2 (USA or to decrease. you set will return and the equalization that you pop. Turn the knob to increase six FM1 and six FM2. one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display. XM2. or speaker control is displayed. Turn the radio on. talk. select BASS. Radio Service) or six DAB1 and six DAB2 (Canada only. rock and classical program types. TREB appears on the display. Press BAND to select AM. you may only. 6. the station equalization settings designed for country. by performing the To adjust bass. midrange or treble to the middle following steps: position. The radio will produce one beep 1. Press and hold one of the six numbered AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button pushbuttons until you hear a beep.

Press the P-TYPE button. Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass. When selected. press appears on the display. front or the rear speakers. AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right 4. 2. push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone may select multiple interrupts if desired. press and hold the adjust the display level to the middle position. press the Finding a PTY Station AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display. position. or TALK. The radio will beep once and will To use the PTY interrupt feature. push the AUDIO knob until BAL category and the category is displayed. the category and then to go to another station. the radio will search To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements. P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt with. To select and find a desired PTY perform the following: If your vehicle is equipped with the Base@ audio 1.To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM). select balance or fade and push and hold the AUDIO knob. If you want to go to another station within that and the left speakers. press either Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to the category’s first station. You position. the last selected RDS produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the station will interrupt play if that selected program type display. If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on. push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on 5. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob. If the category is not sound toward the left or the right speakers. your equalization settings are either CUSTOM selected PTY will be displayed on the screen. go the display. When you are or speaker controls are displayed. an asterick To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle will appear beside that PTY on the display. XMTMand DAB) midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob. Once the desired category is displayed. The radio will listening to a compact disc. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the back to Step 1. press either SEEK arrow twice to display To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers. format is broadcast. (RDS. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display. 3-103 . 3. displayed. P-TYPE and the last system. Turn the knob to move the either SEEK arrow once.

When you turn the ignition off and then on When an alert announcement comes on the current again. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by 2. Press and hold BAND for two set will return. selected PTY will be displayed on the screen. The radio may switch to 5. Whenever you allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the press that numbered pushbutton. AF ON will appear on the display. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob. AF OFF RDS and DAB Messages will appear on the display. ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system. These buttons have factory PTY presets. selected PTY will be displayed on the screen. Press and hold one of the six numbered BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency pushbuttons until you hear a beep. and the radio will begin 2. P-TYPE and the last scanning within your chosen category. P-TYPE and the last favorite PTYs. Press the P-TYPE button. The radio will not switch to ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. ALERT! will appear on the display. performing the following steps: 3. or a compact disc is playing. other stations. Once the desired category is displayed. 4. hold either SCAN arrow. Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. play will stop during the announcement. hear the announcement. the alternate frequency feature will automatically radio station. even if the volume is muted This function does not apply for XMTMor DAB. seconds to turn alternate frequency on. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. the PTY you same program type. 4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a 3. stronger stations. 3-104 . Press the P-TYPE button. press and 1. If the compact disc player is playing. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2. particular station.SCAN: You can also scan through the stations within a Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) category by performing the following: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your 1. This feature is not supported by all RDS stations. You will be turned on.

a station that broadcasts traffic announcements. NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display. or XMTM. if your radio is equipped with message at your own speed. when the TRAF button is pressed. the station that was found. press the INFO button DAB). press this button and the radio of the CD. parts of it TRAFFIC will appear on the display.or DAB station. This function does not apply to XMTMSatellite Radio The old message can be displayed by pressing Service. Press this stop. station you will hear it. you will hear it. Traffic interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the play of a CD. etc. it press this button. will appear every three seconds. If no station is will seek to a station that does. When a traffic announcement comes on tuned radio station you will hear it. When the radio finds a found. 3-105 . message has been displayed. To scroll through the For DAB (Canada only. If no station is found. When the radio finds receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station. Press the TRAF (Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display if the TRAF button. INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received. When the If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic traffic announcement is over. DAB does not repeatedly. the radio will resume play announcements. A new group of words will appear on seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. DAB only the display with each press.INFO (information): If the current station has a station that broadcasts traffic announcements. The message may display a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio the artist and song title. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when button to see the message. Brackets around TRAF will appear on the TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the display. To broadcasts traffic announcements. NO If the whole message is not displayed. The radio will seek to a station that tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. it will message. the INFO button until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to. or DAB station. or XMTM. call in phone numbers. Brackets will be displayed around will stop. Once the complete checks the current frequency for traffic support. INFO will appear on the display.

XMTMRadio Messages (after 4 second delay) 3-106 .

XMTMRadio Messages (cont’d) Radio Display Condition Message I No Info Category Name not available I No Info No Texthformational message available I Not Found XM Locked No channel available for the chosen category Theft lock active Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) label is needed to activate Radio ID not known I I 3-107 .

it will be activated each time you play a disc. You will hear a beep and the light. Do not try to load more than six. The player will pull the disc in. 2. If you select an equalization setting for your disc. This compact green you can load another disc. 3-108 . with the radio on or off. 1. will begin to flash. Once the light stops flashing and turns load CDs into the compact disc player. do the following: appear on the display. the CD symbol will be each time you play a disc. Messages” later in this section. Turn the ignition on. Once the light stops flashing and turns green. label If an error appears on the display. The disc player disc player will hold up to six discs. Load a disc. Turn the ignition on. If the radio is on or off. the last disc loaded will begin to play automatically. number for each disc will be displayed. the disc will begin to play automatically. located to the right of the slot. If the radio is on or off. a label side up. press the LOAD side of button. turn green. Insert the disc partway into the slot. When you have finished loading 2. To insert one disc. located to the right of the slot. When a disc is inserted. Insert the disc partway into the slot. The 3. displayed. it will be activated When a disc is inserted. As each new track starts to play. the light will begin flashing LOAD CD A : Press the LOAD side of this button to again. do the following: To load more than one disc but less than six. load a disc. Once the disc is loaded. the CD symbol will be 4. complete 1. displayed. to radio will begin to play the last CD loaded. the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. see “Compact Disc side up. Steps 1 through 3. The player will pull the disc in. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button for two seconds. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD discs.Playing a Compact Disc 3. takes up to six discs. If you select an equalization setting for your disc. If more than one disc has been loaded. Wait for the light. the track number will To insert multiple discs.

reduced volume. If you try to push the disc back into the receiver. knob off and then on again.Playing a Specific Loaded Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have Compact Disc tried to push it in manually. To play a specific CD. press The display will show elapsed time. If the disc is not removed. the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc several times before stopping. Disc Messages” later in this section. Release it to play the passage. reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. press the PWR is playing. the disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver. and release this button. first press the CD AUX 25-second time period has elapsed. To eject multiple discs. a number will appear on the radio will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the display. 3-109 . remove play. After removing the disc. This will clear the disc-sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into If an error appears on the radio display. button to start playing a CD. You can now remove the disc. To eject the disc that is currently playing. which For every CD loaded. The display will show elapsed time. and the track number will appear. A small bar will appear under the CD number that the disc. after 25 seconds. Then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds tothe CD you want to Once the player stops and the disc is ejected. <( REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to LOAD CD A (Eject): Pressing the CD eject side of reverse quickly within a track. before the 25 second time period is complete. The receivers 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject. You will hear sound at a this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs. press and hold this button for two seconds. see “Compact the player again. You will hear FWD >> (Forward): Press and hold this button to a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a disc is being ejected. REMOVE CD will be displayed.

Press RPT again to turn it off. previously in this section. Press either SCAN arrow again. Use this RDM (Random): With random. current track has been playing. to stop scanning. If you release the RPT button. To play the tracks on all of the discs that are loaded in random order. you can listen to feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the the tracks in random. do the following: the current track. SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. To use repeat. on currently selected disc. on the display (track or elapsed time). RPT will appear on the press the button more than once. press and hold either appear on the display. push the knob until you see the display you want. you can repeat one track k SEEK >I : Press the left arrow to go to the start of or an entire disc. The selected display to select the desired equalization setting while playing will now be the default. moving backward or forward through the disc. the player will continue display. To use random. SCAN will appear on the display. RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. to stop scanning. press and Press the right arrow to go to the next track. see “AUTO EQ” listed disc(s) is in the player. Press RDM again to turn it off. The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc. You will hear a beep and RANDOM feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each ONE will appear on the display. press and release the RDM RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the button. 3-1 10 . rather than sequential.RPT (Repeat): With repeat. Press RPT again to turn it off. To change the default Press RDM again to turn it off. press and hold the RPT button for two seconds. the following: To scan all loaded discs. For more BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a information on AUTO EQ. press and hold RDM for more than appears on the display and you hear a beep. a compact disc. To repeat the track you are listening to. To repeat the disc you are listening to. do one of Press either SCAN arrow again. one disc or on all of the discs. Use this two seconds. press and hold either SCAN To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN random order. RPT will k SCAN >I : To scan one disc. if more than ten seconds have passed. disc loaded. then hold the AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ knob until the display flashes. order.

to save. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired arrow button to locate the track thatyou want track to be deleted. To delete tracks from the song list. S-LIST FULL will appear on the display. If S-LIST is present. perform the 2. will be heard immediately. one beep more seconds to save the track into memory.Using Song List Mode If you attempt to save more than 20 selections. beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the display. 3. After two seconds of pressing two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has SONG LIST continuously. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or seconds. perform the order that they were saved. button to turn it off. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections. The track will begin to play. When pressing SONG LIST. S-LIST should not appear in the display. Turn the disc player on. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the To save tracks into the song list feature. section for more information. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song following steps: list mode. 5. two beeps will sound to been deleted. 2. 4. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this return you to the first saved track. This feature is capable of saving 20 track To play the song list. pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right 3. 3-1 11 . One selections. Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one SCAN arrows. press the SONG LIST button. immediately. Seeking past the last saved track will disc. press the SONG LIST 1. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered S-LIST will appear on the display. following steps: You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK 1. After two seconds When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously. confirm that the track has been saved. The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.

S-LIST EMPTY will If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be appear on the display indicating that the song corrected. the disc should play. The disc is dirty. for any other reason. wait about an hour and S-LIST will appear on the display. those tracks are automatically deleted from the song list. Turn the disc player on. press the SONG LIST button. it could be due to one of the following reasons: To delete the entire song list.After a track has been deleted. To end song list mode. wet or upside down. One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from the display. display. than four seconds. If your radio displays an list has been deleted. If a disc is ejected. Any tracks saved to the song list again are added to the bottom of the list. contact your dealer. 2. the remaining tracks are Compact Disc Messages moved up the list. A beep will be heard. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. followed try a known good CD. When the following steps: road becomes smoother. When another track is added to the song list. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more If the CD is not playing correctly. 3. 3-1 12 . by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will be heard after four seconds. the track will be added to the end of CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio the list. 1. perform the You’re driving on a very rough road. scratched. write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem. If so. error message. The air is very humid. and the song list contains saved tracks from that disc. try again.

The driver Entertainment (RSE) System. RSE OFF. the DVD symbol will should not try to do so.Listening to a DVD Before You Drive Your vehicle may have an overhead Rear Seat The RSE system is for rear seat passengers. If your vehicle has this cannot safely view the video screen while driving and system and a DVD is playing. Home Disc (DVD) Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. ACCESSORY. “DVD Messages” later in this section. if a CD is loaded. The button until RSE appears on the radio display. two sets of wireless headphones. press the CD AUX button. Your vehicle may have the optional Digital Versatile The DVD player will also play audio CDs. The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate DVD region code for the country that the vehicle was sold in. see control. The recorded CDs (CD-R or CD-RW formats) will not play in RSE system includes a DVD player. a video display this DVD player. The radio will return to the last radio source that you were listening to. To stop listening to See “Remote Control’’ later in this section for more the DVD. or Retained Accessory go off of the radio display and the radio will display Power (RAP). The DVD region Rear Seat Entertainment System code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs. appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is available and can be listened through your vehicles DVD Player speakers. The DVD player power may be turned on when the When the RSE system is turned off. screen. press the CD AUX The DVD player is located in the overhead console. come through the speakers. or press the BAND button to select a different source. To listen to the DVD. The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the current radio source will stop and the DVD sound will DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control. 3-113 . and a remote If an error message appears on the video screen. the DVD symbol will ignition is in RUN. information.

the vehicle ignition is in RUN. Some DVDs will begin playing (Stop): Press this button to stop the play of the after the previews have finished. If a disc is already in the player. to start play of a DVD or CD and to toggle between play and pause of a DVD or CD. (Display Menu): Press this button to modify the video screen display characteristics. Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skip the copyright or previews. player on. A (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or a CD. (Enter): Press this button to select items within a menu./I1 (Play/Pause): Press this button to turn the DVD title menu. if on or off. press the play/pause button on the face of the DVD player or on the remote SRCE (Source): Press this button to toggle between control. 3-1 14 . (Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu (this button only operates with a DVD). refer to the on-screen the beginning of the DVD. Playing a Disc DVD Player Buttons To play a disc. ACCESSORY. gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot. Press this button twice to return to begin to play the main title. (Menu Navigation): Use the arrow keys to navigate through a menu. the DVD player and an auxiliary source. If the DVD does not DVD player. The DVD player will continue 6 (Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system loading the disc and the player will automatically start. as the DVD may be displaying its main . instructions. or RAP.

Stopping and Resume Playback DVD Messages
To stop a disc, press and release the stop button on the The following errors may be displayed on the video
DVD player or the remote control.To resume playback, screen:
press the play/pause button on the DVD player or Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed
the remote control. As long as the disc has not been
if a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not
ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice,
able to be read or if the disc format is not
the movie should resume play from where it was last
compatible with the DVD player.
stopped. If the disc has been ejected, or if the stop
button has been pressed twice, the disc will resume play Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if
at the beginning. the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Ejecting a Disc Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if
the DVD player can not play the disc. Severely
Press the eject button on the DVD player to eject damaged discs will cause this error.
the disc.
Region Code Error: This message will be
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not displayed if the region code of the DVD is not
removed, the DVD player will reload the disc within compatible with the DVD player.
25 to 30 seconds. The disc will then be stored in the
DVD player. The DVD player will not resume play of this No Disc: This message will be displayed if the
disc automatically. PLAY button is pressed and no disc is in the player.

3-1 15

Parental Control Button: This button is located on the The DVD player and display will continue to operate
front of the DVD console, behind the video screen, when the screen is in either the up or the down position.
near the driver of the vehicle. Press this button while a The video screen contains the infrared transmitters for
DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute the wireless headphones and the infrared receiver
the audio. The video screen will display Parental Control for the remote control. If the screen is in the closed
ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player position, the infrared signals will not be available for the
will flash. It will also disable all other button operations operation of the headphones and the remote control.
from the remote control and the DVD player (with
the exception of the eject button). The driver will then Nofice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, as
be able to gain the attention of the rear seat passengers. damage may occur. Do not touchthe video screen.
Press this button again to restore normal operation of See “Cleaning the Video Screen” in the Index
the DVD player. for more information.

This button may also be used to turn the DVD player Remote Control
power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is To use the remote control, aim it at the infrared window
in an enabled power mode.
below the video screen and press the desired button.
Video Screen Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the abilityof
the entertainment system to receive signals from the
The video screen is located in the overhead console. To remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
use the video screen, push forward on the release be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s See “Battery Replacement’’ later in this section.
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
use, push it up into its latched position.
function of the remote control.

3-116

Remote Control Buttons D. Display Menu: Press this button to modify the video
screen display characteristics.
E. Audio: Press this button to call-up a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is being played. The
format and content of this function is defined by the
disc and is dependent of the disc.
F. Fast Reverse: Press this button to fast reverse the
DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this
button again. This button may not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright or the previews.
G. Source: Press this button to toggle between the
DVD player and an auxiliary source.
H. Stop: Press this button to stop the play of a DVD or
CD. Press this button twice to return to the beginning
of the DVD.
I. Previous TracWChapter: Press this button to return
to the start of the current track or chapter. Press this
A. Power: Press this button to turn the DVD player on button again to return to the previous track or
or off. chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
B. Title: Press this button to return the DVD to the playing the copyright or the previews.
main menu of the DVD. J. Numeric Key Pad: The remote control numeric
C. Menu Navigation: Use the arrow keys to navigate keypad provides you with the capability of direct
through a menu. The up arrow will skip to the next chapter, title and track number selection.
chapter or track, the down arrow will take you to the Press the button, located on the bottom left of the
beginning of the current chapter or track. Press numeric key pad, within 3 seconds of inputting
the down arrow twice to take you to the previous a numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs.
chapter or track. The right arrow will fast forward and Press the button, located on the bottom left of the
the left arrow will fast reverse through a chapter or numeric key pad, to select chapter, title, and
track. track numbers greater then 9.
3-1 17

K. Illumination: Press this button to turn the remote Battery Replacement
control backlight on.
To change the batteries, do the following:
L. Menu: Press this button to access the DVD menu
(this button only operates with a DVD). 1. Remove the battery compartment door located 017
the bottom of the remote control.
M. Enter: Press this button to select items within
a menu. 2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
N. Return: Press this button to exit the current active
menu and return to the previous menu. This button 3. Close the battery door securely.
will operate only when a DVD is being played Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat or
and a menu is active. direct sunlight. This could damage the remote
0. Angle: Press this button to call-up a menu that will control and it would not be covered by your vehicles
operate only when a DVD is being played. The warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
format and content of this function is defined by the cool, dry place.
disc and is dependent of the disc. If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
P. Subtitle: Press this button to call-up a menu that will time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
operate only when a DVD is being played. The dry place.
format and content of this function is defined by the
disc and is dependent of the disc.
Headphones
Q. Fast Forward: Press this button to fast forward the The RSE system includes two sets of wireless infrared
DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this headphones.
button again. This button may not work when the Each set of headphones have an ON/OFF control. To
DVD is playing the copyright or the previews. use the headphones activate the ON/OFF control.
R. Play/Pause: Press this button to turn the DVD An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones. If
player on, to start play of a DVD or CD and to toggle the light does not illuminate, the batteries may need
between play and pause of a DVD or CD. to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
S. Next TracWChapter: Press this button to advance section for more information. To turn the headphones
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This OFF activate the ON/OFF control.
button may not work when the DVD is playing Each set of headphones has a rotary volume control. To
the copyright or the previews. adjust the volume, adjust this control.
3-118

The headphones will automatically turn off if they lose Stereo RCA Jacks
the infrared signal from the system after approximately
four minutes in order to preserve their battery power. The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen on
The signal may belost if the system is turned off or if the the front of the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow
headphones are out of range of the infrared signal you to connect audio and video from an auxiliary device
transmitters that are located below the video display such as a camcorder or a video game unit to your
screen. RSE system just as you would to a standard television.
Standard RCA cables are needed to connect the
Battery Replacement auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. The yellow connector
To change the batteries, do the following: inputs video and the red and white connectors input
right and left stereo audio. Refer to the manufacturer’s
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door instructions for proper connection of your auxiliary
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece. device.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment. To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
Make sure that they are installed correctly. an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
3. Tighten the screws to close the compartment door. jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
Notice; Do not store the headphones in heat or previously in the DVD player mode, you will need
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones to press the SRCE button on the faceplate or the remote
and would not be covered by your warranty. control to change to the auxiliary mode. Pressing the
Keep the headphones stored in a cool place. SRCE button will toggle the RSE system between
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of the auxiliary device and the BVD player.
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.

3-1 19

How to Change the Video Format when in The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
the Auxiliary Mode by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC. In information.
some countries, the video format may be in PAL system.
To change the video format, perform the following: The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE
1. Press the display menu button. system may be selected as an audio source on the
2. Press the navigation down arrow key to scroll down radio if the RSE system power is on. Once the
to Video Format. RSE system is selected as an audio source on the radio
you may adjust the speaker volume on the radio. If
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format. the RSE system power is not on, the RSE system will
4. Press the navigation key to select the PAL video not be an available source on the radio. Refer to
format. the radio information for the radio that your vehicle has
5. Press the enter button to accept the change. for more information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
Audio Output wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat Audio system
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be (if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
heard through the following possible sources: an audio source on the Rear Seat Audio system if the
RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio
Wireless Headphones (RSA) on page 3-722 for more information.
Vehicle Speakers
Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)

3-1 20

Problem Recommended Action Problem Recommended Action
No power. The ignition might not be In auxiliary mode, the Check the signal coming
in on or accessory.The picture moves or scrolls. from the auxiliary device
parental control button and make sure that the
might have been pressed. connection and the signal
(The power indicator light is good.Change the Video
will flash.) Format to PAL or NTSC.
Disc will not play. The system might be off. See “Stereo RCA Jacks”
The parental control previously for how to
button might have been change the video format.
pressed. (The power The language in the audio Press the Menu button on
indicator light will flash.) or on the screen is wrong. the DVD player or on the
The system might be in remote control and
auxiliary source mode. change the audio or
Press the SRCE button language selection on the
to toggle between the DVD menu.
DVD player and the The remote control does Point the remote control
auxiliary source.The disc not work. directly at the infrared
is upside down or is not window below the video
compatible. screen while using.Check
The picture does not fill Press the Display that the batteries are not
the screen. There are button on the DVD dead or put in wrong.The
black borders on the top player or on the remote parental control button
and bottom or on both control. Change the might have been pressed.
sides or it looks display mode. (The power indicator light
stretched out. will flash.)
The disc was ejected, but The disc is being stored
it was pulled back into in the DVD player. Press
the DVD player. the eject button again to
eject the disc.

3-121

Problem Recommended Action Problem Recommended Action
After stopping the player, I If the stop button was Sometimes the wireless This could be caused by
push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the headphone audio cuts out interference from cellular
the DVD starts where I DVD player will resume or buzzes. telephone towers or by
left off and sometimes at playing where the DVD using your cellular
the beginning. was stopped. If the stop telephone in the vehicle.
button was pressed two I lost the remote and/or See your dealer for
times the DVD player will the headphones. assistance.
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD. What is the best way to Wipe the video screen
clean the video screen? with a soft cloth that is
The auxiliary source is Press the SRCE button to 1 damp with water.
running but there is no change from the DVD
picture or sound. player mode to the
auxiliary source
mode.Check to make sure
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
that the auxiliary source is This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
connected to the inputs of the audio sources: radio, cassette tapes, CDs,
properly.
DVDs, XM (if your vehicle is equipped with XMTM
My disc is stuck in the Press the Load/Eject Satellite Radio Service), or DAB (if your vehicle is
player. The Load/Eject button on the DVD equipped with DAB) depending on your vehicles options.
button does not work. player.Turn the power off,
then on again, then press However, the rear seat passengers can only control
the Load/Eject button on the music sources that the front seat passengers are not
the DVD player.Do not listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may
attempt to forcibly remove listen to a cassette tape through headphones while the
the disc from the DVD driver listens to the radio through the front speakers.
player. This could The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for
permanently damage the each set of headphones. The front seat audio controls
DVD player. always override the RSA controls.

3-122

Rear Seat Audio Controls - (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume. The left knob controls the left headphone and
the right knob controls the right headphone.
SRC (Source): Press this button to select an audio
source: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, DVDs, XM (if your
vehicle is equipped with XMTMSatellite Radio Service),
or DAB (if your vehicle is equipped with DAB)
depending on your vehicles options.

v SEEK A : While listening to AM, FM1 or FM2, XM1
or XM2, DAB1, or DAB2, press the up or the down
arrow to tune to the next or to the previous station and
stay there. If the front radio is in use, you cannot
seek through different stations.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up or the
RSA with HVAC Shown, RSA without HVAC Similar down arrow to hear the next or the previous selection. If
the cassette tape on the front radio is in use, you
The following functions are controlled by the RSA cannot seek through different selections on a tape.
system buttons: While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go
(1) (Power): Press this button to turn the rear seat back to the start of the current track if more than eight
audio system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted seconds have played. If the CD player on the front radio
when the power is turned on unless your vehicle is is in use, you cannot seek through different tracks.
equipped with the Base@ audio system. You may
operate the rear seat audio functions even when the
primary radio power is off.

3-123

PROG (Program): The front passengers must be Audio Steering Wheel Controls
listening to something different for each of these
functions to work: You can control certain radio functions using the buttons
Press this button to go to the preset radio stations on your steering wheel.
set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.
When a CD is playing in the radio, press this button
to go back to the beginning of the CD.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to select a disc.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning (OnStarNoice Recognition): If your vehicle has
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If OnStap, you can press this button to interact with
the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not the Onstar@system. See the Onstar@manual provided
operate and LOCKED will be displayed. with your vehicle for more information.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking IF your vehicle does not have Onstar@,pressing this
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK@is armed. button will mute the audio system.
With THEFTLOCK@activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.

3-124

AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. or DAB1 or * Excludes the Onstar@System. You may experience audio distortion in the press this button to play the other side of the tape. (if your vehicle is equipped with the XMTM Satellite Radio Service). FM2. If a IR headphones when operating cellular phones. FM1 . CD is playing. CB radios. or to decrease volume. The longer range. Available loaded sources are shown on the Understanding Radio Reception display as a tape or a CD symbol. 3-1 25 . two-way radios. press this button to go to the next scanners. mobile fax. can there. Global Position Systems (GPS)*. available CD. Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals. causing the sound to come and go. but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). however. If a cassette tape is playing. A SOURCE v : Press this button to select AM. or walkie talkies. DAB2 (if your vehicle is equipped with DAB). It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle. The cassette or CD must be loaded to play. FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound. cause stations to interfere with each other. or XMI or XM2. to the next or to the previous radio station and stay especially at night. Try A V O L v : Press the up or the down arrow to increase reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it. AM A SEEK 7: Press the up or the down arrow to seek The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM. or a cassette tape or CD.PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station DVD Distortion you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons on the selected band.

Your radio may display clean the tape player. direct sunlight and 2. recommended cleaning cassette is available through tall buildings or hills can interfere with radio signals. tape player needs to be cleaned. the sound to come and go. Turn the radio off. use the following steps: reduced sound quality. Cassette tapes should be stored in their 1. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five properly or may cause failure of the tape player. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer‘s message appears on the display. because the cut Care of Your Cassette Tape Player tape detection feature on your radio may recognize it as a broken tape. To prevent the cleaning A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause cassette from being ejected. in error. If this 5. use a scrubbing action. your cassette recommended cleaning time. 3-126 . your dealership. Just as with FM. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. non-abrasive DAB Radio cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. It will still play tapes. ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Your radio When cleaning the cassette tape player with the may display “NO SIGNAL” to indicate interference. causing other cassette has no improvement in sound quality. If this or hills can interfere with Satellite radio signals. tall buildings see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. The DAB gives you digital radio reception. it is possible that the cassette may eject. Turn the ignition on. If you notice a XMTMSatellite Radio gives you digital radio reception reduction in sound quality. recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette. Your radio may display CLEAN to 4. try a known good cassette to from coast to coast. READY will appear on the display and Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds. they may not operate 3. causing the sound to come and go. For best results. seconds. cases away from contaminants.XMTMSatellite Radio Service but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. “NO SIGNAL” to indicate interference. Just as with FM. 50 hours of use. indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. extreme heat. If they aren’t.

soft cloth in a mild. handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer After you clean the player.or CLEANED to show the Care of Your CD and DVD Player indicator was reset. the cut Care of Your CDs and DVDs tape detection feature is active again. If the surface of a disc is soiled. neutral detergent solution may not clean as thoroughly asthe scrubbing type and clean it. 3-127 . Store them in their original cases cleaner which uses a cassettewith a fabric belt to or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight clean the tape head. press and hold the eject edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. wet-type Handle discs carefully. dry-type Be sure never to touch the side without writing when cleaning cassette is not recommended. Cleaning the Video Screen Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth and gently wipe the video screen. Always make sure the cassette with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised. A non-scrubbing action cleaner a clean. You may also choose a non-scrubbing action. The radio will display--. dampen not eject on its own. tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced. The use of a non-scrubbing action. wiping from the center to the edge. Do not spray directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or too long on the video screen. button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator. due to Cassettes are subject to wearand the sound quality the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics may degrade over time. cleaner.When the cleaning cassette has been ejected. This typeof cleaning cassette will and dust.

Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception. to the cowl. The chimelevel will change from theloud level to normal. Make default or normal setting. The radio is the vehicle chime producer. Your XMTMSatellite Radio antenna is located on the Chime Level Adjustment roof of your vehicle. Each time the chime volumeis changed. The chime volume if your sunroof is open. again. Make sure System that the DAB antenna is not obstructed. If the mast should ever vehicle. up for clear radio reception. level will change fromthe normal level to loud. The performance of your DAB system may be affected then with a wrench one quarter turn. you can straighten it out by hand. 3-128 . press and hold pushbutton 6 with the The performance of your XMTM system may be affected ignition on and the radio power off. If your vehicle is purchased in Canada and driven into you should replace it. press and hold pushbutton 6 sure that the XMTMsatellite antenna is not obstructed. If tightening is required. the United States the DAB radio antenna system will not Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened function. Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna with the performance of your DAB system. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build become slightly bent.Fixed Mast Antenna DAB Radio Antenna System The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes Your DAB antenna is located on the roof of your without being damaged. if your sunroof is open. DAB radio reception is availablein Canada only. To change the volume level. If the mast is badly bent. and NORMALwill be displayed. tighten by hand. Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes. as it might be by vandals. To change back to the with the performance of your XMTMsystem. three chimes will sound as an example of the new volume selected. and LOUD Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere will be displayed on the radio.

............4-38 4........................... 4-56 Loss of Control ................................................................... Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle Your Driving............. 4-6 Highway Hypnosis ........... 4-50 Steering ................... 4-11 If You Are Stuck: In Sand................................................................................. 4-57 Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive AutorideTM ........................................... 4-59 Driving at Night ................ Mud.. 4-16 Towing Your Vehicle .......... 4-42 Drunken Driving ....... 4-2 Freeway Driving ...................... Stabilitrak@ System ................................... 4-11 Ice or Snow ........ 4-59 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ........................................................................................................ 4-53 Passing ...................................................... 4-21 Level Control .............................. 4-14 Towing ...... 4-58 Vehicle ........................... 4-19 Loading Your Vehicle .......................................................................... 4-53 Off-Road Recovery ....... and Your Vehicle ..................................... 4-41 Defensive Driving ..... 4-19 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...... 4-22 Trailer Recommendations .............. 4-46 Locking Rear Axle ................... 4-44 Traction Assist System (TAS) ..... 4-36 Towing a Trailer .................................. 4-6 Hill and Mountain Roads .......................................................... 4-44 Braking .......................1 .......................................................................................... 4-9 Winter Driving ..... 4-53 QUADRASTEERTM ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-43 Control of a Vehicle ................... the Road......... 4-3 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................................4-2 City Driving ....................................

rural roads or freeways.makes proper defensive driving more difficult Everyone on page 1-22. with resulting injury. Anything that distracts from the defensively.Your Driving.such as concentrating on a cellular Please start with a very important safety device in your telephone call. Be ready for their mistakes. Yet theyare common. and Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. 4-2 . It’s the best defensive driving maneuver.” On city streets. in both city and rural driving. reading.” defensive driving techniques could save your life. These simple “always expect the unexpected. or pull off the Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything. Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Defensive Driving Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive the driving task. or reaching for something on vehicle: Buckle up. the Road. Anticipate what they might do. See Safety Belts: They Are for the floor . You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. it means road in a safe place to do them yourself. and can even cause a collision. Allow enough following Your Vehicle distance. Ask a passenger to help do thingslike this. driving task .

nearly half the adult population . claiming thousands of victims There are good medical. more than 0 The drinker’s body weight 16. a national tragedy. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less Muscular Coordination than many might think.Drunken Driving Many adults . so they Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is never drive after drinking.by some estimates. In recent years.000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been The amount of food that is consumed before and associated with the use of alcohol. For persons under 21. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway a vehicle: safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and Judgment then drive. 4-3 .000 people injured. state to drink alcohol. the highway death toll. Attentiveness. It’s the number one contributor to it’s against the law in every U. In most cases. 0 The amount of alcohol consumed these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol. here is some general information on the problem. Although it depends on each Vision person and situation. psychological and every year. with more than during drinking 300.S.choose never to drink alcohol. developmental reasons for these laws. The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone Police records show that almost half of all motor who is drinking depends upon four things: vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol.

The BAC will be over 0. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men. The person would reach the BAC would be close to 0. Of course. a 180 Ib It’s the amount of alcohol that counts.1/2 ounces have a somewhat lower BAC level. The law in an increasing number of U. For example. states.06 percent.12 percent. gin or vodka. as we’ve seen. the limit is even lower. Since alcohol is carried in body water. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0. it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks. it is 0.08 percent. For example. if (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC or 90 mi of liquor each) within an hour.According to the American Medical Association. this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks.04 percent. and throughout Canada. A person same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses who consumes food just before or during drinking will of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 .S. There is a gender difference. (45 mi) of a liquor like whiskey. In some other countries. the person’s of about 0. sets the legal limit at 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). too. and how quickly the person drinks them. 4-4 .

as when a child darts into the judgement can be affected by even a small street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not amount of alcohol. What if there’s an emergency. All injuries worse. and that the effects are worse at night. Ride home in a cab.. Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking._. answer. Medical research shows of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash 0.. spinal drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0. A driver with a BAC level of permanently disabled is higher than if the person had 0..05 percent or above. the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater.. even fatal-collision if you drive after drinking.. the chance is 25 times greater! The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink.05 percent.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a not been drinking. This means that when anyone who Statistics show that the chanceof being in a collision has been drinking ..driver or passenger . collision. designate a driver who will not drink.15 percent. .10 percent..‘y dangerous. that person’s chance of being killed or 0. attentiveness and take sudden action. a need to Your reflexes. At a BAC level of 0. cord or heart. 4-5 .is in a increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of crash. You can have a serious-or be able to react quickly enoughto avoid the collision.05 percent. “1’11 be careful” isn’t the right Dr 3 and then driving . or if you’re with a group. perceptions. especially injuries to the brain. at a level of 0. -. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. Research shows that the driving skills many people don’t know.But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of There’s something else about drinking and driving that 0.10 percent.

All three systems have to do their First. 4-6 . physical condition. as when you’re driving on snow or ice. actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel). Sometimes.Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go Braking action involves perception time and where you want it to go. Average reaction time is about 3/4of a second. But that’s only an average. the steering reaction time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That could be a lot of distance in an emergency. you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That’s reaction time. But even in 3/4 of a second. That’s perception time. the condition of the road (wet. work atthe places where the tires meet the road. the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. drugs and frustration. a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. So do alcohol. Also see Traction Assist System (TAS) on page 4-9. They are the brakes. tire tread. alertness. and the accelerator. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. icy). coordination and eyesight all play a part. the condition of your brakes. And. of course. dry. Age. so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important.

it may take longer to stop and Brake System Warning the brake pedal will be harder to push. This is Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. When you start your engine and begin to drive away. If you do. stops. Your brakes will wear out much braking skid. this warning light will But you will use it when you brake. See Anti-Lock assist is used up.Avoid needless heavy braking. If there’s a DRP problem. The lights and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on until the problem is repaired. If your engine the anti-lock brake system.rather than keeping pace with traffic. faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. Your brakes may not have time to cool electronic braking system that will help prevent a between hard stops. your anti-lock brake system will check itself. If there’s a problem with the pedal may get harder to push down. Once the power stay on. Light on page 3-42. Some people drive in Anti-lock Brake System spurts . you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear Proportioning (DRP) system. You That means better braking and longer brake life. See your dealer for service. brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. ABS is an advanced a mistake. This is normal. you will still have some power brake assist.heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking . 4-7 . may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on. If your engine ever stops while you’re driving. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances. Along with ABS. both the Brake and ABS warning lights will come on accompanied by a 10-second chime.

your computer keeps receiving updates will separately work the brakes at each front wheel on wheel speed and controls braking pressure and at both rear wheels. Let's say the road is wet and you're driving safely. Here's what happens with ABS: A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. an animal jumps out in front of you. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling. The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. accordingly. the computer As you brake. 4-8 . This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard. The computeris programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. Suddenly. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.

you can steer and brake at the same time. under some conditions. the system reduces engine power to limit Using Anti-Lock wheel spin. an abrupt upshift or downshift of the transmission or driving on rough roads. Just hold the brake pedal down The traction control system is enabled every time your firmly and let anti-lock work for you. The system will activate if it senses the brakes vibrate. Don’t pump the brakes. Braking in Emergencies You may hear or feel the system working or notice a lack of accelerator response. but that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose this is normal. The system operates only if it Always leave enough room up ahead to stop. If you get too close to the Your vehicle may have a Traction Assist System (TAS) vehicle in front of you. Examples of these conditions include a hard acceleration in a turn. With anti-lock. traction. you won’t have time to apply that limits wheel spin. When this happens. You may feel vehicle is started. 4-9 . but this is normal. steering can help you more The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads than even the very best braking. spinning or beginning to lose traction.Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need Traction Assist System (TAS) to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. or you may notice some noise. This is especially useful in your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. When this happens. even senses that one or both of the rear wheels are though you have anti-lock brakes. you may notice a reduction in acceleration. slippery road conditions. In many emergencies. This is normal and doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.

This is normal. or if the vehicle has accordingly. to limit wheel spin. either by The Traction Assist System. Adjust your driving on for long periods of time. But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need to. This is normal. will automatically come on whenever you start automatic engagement feature of the TAS. “Cruise Control” under Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever on page 3-7. Anti-Lock Brake System . Ice or Snow on page 4-50. you may re-engage the cruise control. slows disengage.If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road. You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand. you should always leave the operate in this gear. TAS will not slippery road conditions. the cruise control will automatically When the vehicle leaves the rough surface. Mud. or engine-related problem has been detected and When the traction off light the vehicle needs service. is on. A Traction Assist System. The Traction Assist System is turned off. To limit wheel spin. as delivered from the pressing the TAS on/off button or turning off the factory. the TAS is off and will not limit wheel If the vehicle has been driven with the TAS system spin. The system will automatically re-enable after approximately two minutes of not using the brakes. The traction off light will come on under the following conditions: See Traction Off Light on page 3-43. mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. When road conditions allow you to safely down or stops. system on. See be on again. See “Rocking Your Vehicle’’ under If You Are Stuck: In Sand. especially in The transmission is in FIRST (1). 4-10 . your vehicle. the light will go off and TAS will use it again. gone through many several high speed braking maneuvers the system may be automatically disabled.

h. ice. press the accelerator insure there are no problems. but when one of the rear wheels has no traction off light will come on and stay on. there is a problem with your vehicle. mud. traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control 1. Park the vehicle with the ignition off and the of the vehicle in most driving conditions. sand or gravel. Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds. You can turn the and the other does. your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow. (32 km/h). two miles of driving before the system initializes. the traction time. Whether the TAS instrument panel. transmission in PARK (P). The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 m. 4. To turn the system on or The next time you start your vehicle. To do so: combines antilock brake. the TAS will not off. Apply the brake pedal. You may hear or feel pedal to the floor and thenpress the TAS on/off the system working. away. You can restore the automatic button located on the feature by using the same procedure. Release the TAS button and both pedals. 4-1 1 .p. again. This is normal and does not mean button and hold it down for at least six seconds. you can always turn the system on or off by pressing the TAS on/off button. press the TAS on/off automatically come on. Turn the ignition to RUN. it may take approximately 5. It works like a standard axle most of the If you used the button to turn the system off. If desired. is set to come on automatically or not. Locking Rear Axle If your vehicle has this feature. The traction off light should go off. you can change the TAS automatic Stabilitrak@' System engagement feature so that the system will not come on Your vehicle is equipped with the Stabilitrak@which automatically when the engine is started. this feature will allow the wheel with system back on at any timeby pressing the button traction to move the vehicle. When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive 2. the system performs several diagnostic checks to 3. do not start the engine. In some cases.

but it may be necessary to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand. the traction off light will message may appear. Your vehicle will still have your vehicle hasn’t gone through hard acceleration brake-traction control when Stabilitrak@is off. and the STABILITY SYS DISABLED vehicle does not need servicing. see Driver It is recommended to leave the system on for normal Information Center (DIC) on page 3-52. the STABILITY Stabilitrak@and part of the traction control system can SYS DISABLED or SERVICE STABILITY message be turned off or back on by pressing the will be displayed. your illuminate. driving conditions. and the STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will appear on the DIC. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand. When the transfer case is in 4 low. system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for more information. this is normal. In 4 low.If the system fails to turn on or activate. All-wheel drive vehicles must be in acceleration or braking during the first two miles after all-wheel drive mode to turn the system on or off. The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear on When the Stabilitrak@ system has beenturned off you the Driver Information Center (DIC) only when the may still hear system noises as a result of the system is both on and activated. and you want to “rock” your vehicle to button is located on the attempt to free it. and control system are disabled. If this is the case. the Stabilitrak@button only turns the traction control system on and off. If the vehicle has gone through heavy Stabilitrak@button. 4-12 . the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high wheel spin is required. You may also feel or brake-traction control coming on. your vehicle should be will not be able to use the engine speed management taken in for service. the STABILITY SYS DISABLED When the system is turned off. but or braking in the first two miles. If either message both the stability system and part of the traction appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC). ice The Stabilitrak@mode or snow. Mud. Turn your vehicle off message will appear on the DIC to warn the driver that and back on again to reset the system. For more information on the stability messages. Ice or Snow on page 4-50. mud. starting your vehicle. the stability system is automatically disabled. hear the system working. It may also be necessary to turn off instrument panel.

only the braking. The system will come back on after the The engine speed management will be disabled. This can take up to two minutes or this state. disabled. If reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed you do. and the driven wheels can spin more freely.Traction control limits wheel spin by allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively. If you turn off Stabilitrak@.You should immediately reduce when you start your vehicle. the traction off light will flash to indicate management) and by applying brakes to each individual that you may be causing damage to your transfer wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary. 4-13 . You should immediately reduce engine power until the lights and messages are no longer displayed. This can cause the brake-traction control to activate Notice: Don’t allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin constantly.Traction Control Operation Notice: If the traction off light comes on due to heavy braking and/or because the traction control The traction control system is part of the system has been continuously active. and it will activate engine power until the tractionoff light stops and display the TRACTION ACTIVE message in the flashing. ABS and brake message. engine power is not reduced automatically longer depending on brake usage. In brakes have cooled. case. Driver Information Center (DIC) if it senses that any of If the brake-traction control system activates constantly the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed while driving. see Driver Information Center (DIC) on lights are on and the SERVICE STABILITY MESSAGE page 3-52. is displayed. the system may not be able to flash the traction off light to warn the driver of possible damage to the transfer case. the brake-traction control will be automatically brake-traction control portion of traction control will work. This could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. In this situation. This could lead to costly repairs not covered The traction control system is enabled automatically by your warranty. do not Stabilitrak@ system. For more information on the traction active excessively when the traction off.

inertia re-engage the cruise control. you can steer but the tires meet the road. See “Cruise Control” under will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. you may you turn the front wheels. the angle at vehicle. What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal. If Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever on page 3-7 you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice. appear on the Driver Information Center and the cruise The traction of the tires against the road surface makes control will automatically disengage. and slow down. you should see your dealer for service. which the curve is banked. Adding the sudden acceleration it will take much more effort. When road it possible for the vehicle to change its path when conditions allow you to use cruise again. 4-14 . the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will the same laws of physics when driving on curves. notice a reduction in acceleration. you’ll Stabilitrak@may also turn off automatically if it understand this. This is normal. While you’re in a curve. the news happen on curves. determines that a problem exists with the system. When this happens you may It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. Then Power Steering you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems - If you lose power steering assist because the engine steering and acceleration . If there’s no traction. or may hear a noise A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on or vibration. If the The traction you can get in a curve depends on the problem does not clear itself after restarting the condition of your tires and the road surface.have to do their work where stops or the system is not functioning. You can lose control. Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.The traction control system may activate on dry or Steering Tips rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts Driving on Curves of the transmission. See Traction Assist System (TAS) on page 4-9. speed is the one factor you can Steering control. and your speed. each of us is subject to activates. can demand too much of those places. Here’s why: If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system Experienced driver or beginner. steer the vehicle the way you want it to go.

Of course. to the left or right depending on the space available. the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Try to adjust your speedso you can “drive” through the curve. you can avoid these problems by braking . First apply your brakes. But sometimes you can’t. youcome over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane. or achild darts out from between quick decision. while your front wheels are straight ahead. do it before you enter the curve. It is better to remove as much at all times and wear safety belts properly. and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. once you have avoided the object. You the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions. If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve. Maintain a reasonable. steady speed. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like The fact that such emergency situations are always these. Under less favorable conditions you’ll wantto go slower. But you have to act fast. For example. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve.if you can stop can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without in time. or a car suddenly pulls An emergency like this requires close attention and a out from nowhere. steer That’s the time for evasive action . Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking.steering around the quickly. speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem. 4-15 . and just as quickly straighten the wheel problem. there isn’t room.Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. If you are holding the steering wheel at parked cars and stops right in front of you. removing either hand. possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving See Braking on page 4-6.

if you The switch is located on the instrument panel. it is recommended to leave the vehicle in this mode at all times. are turning the system will not engage until the turn is complete. 4-1 6 . - : 4 3 II If your vehicle is equipped with the 4 Wheel Steer system it has the ability to steer the vehicle with all four wheels Once the 4 Wheel Steer mode is selected. 2: In this mode the vehicle will operate like any other vehicle with two wheel steering. lights up. If the 2 indicator is flashing you will haveto center the steering Fourwheel steering (4) wheel by turning it to the left or right.QUADRASTEERTM The QUADRASTEERTM System has a control and diagnostic module that monitors and records current system status and operational information. different driving modes: press the button until the 2 indicator. for example when entering a car wash. If you want to use The 4 Wheel Steer system is equipped with three 2 wheel steer mode and your vehicle is not in this mode. Four wheel steering with a trailer mode (q ) Your vehicle will return to 2 when the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL. however. You can select this mode at any speed. located to the Two wheel steering (2) right of the 4 Wheel Steer button. and during all driving and weather conditions.

L Higher Speeds (40 m. It is recommended At slower speeds the front and rear wheels will turn in for all types and weights of trailers. Slower Speeds (below 40 m. This helps the vehicle make tighter turns.If you want to use tire chains.h. This improves stability of the vehicle during lane changes and sweeping turns. press the button. the vehicle needs to be in 2 wheel steer mode. opposite directions. and above) At higher speeds the front and rear wheels will turn in the same direction.h. (4 Wheel Steer tow mode): When towing a trailer the 4 wheel steer tow mode provides enhanced stability allowing the trailer to follow the path of the tow vehicle more closely.p. 4: In this mode all four wheels will help steer the vehicle.p. If you want to use 4. such as during parking. until the 4 indicator. 4-17 . located to the right of the 4 Wheel Steer button. If the 4 indicator is flashing you will have to center the steering wheel by turning it to the left or right. cornering and turning into tight spaces. especially during lane changes. comes on and stays on. and your vehicle is not in this mode. but is enhanced for trailer towing./ 64 km/h ) In this mode the system operates much like the 4 mode./64 km/h.

While in the 4 wheel steer tow mode.To engage the 4 Wheel Steer tow mode. Only use conveyor system car washes with 13-inch (33 cm) wide conveyor rails and/or stationary washes withat least 82 inches (208 cm) between the rails. press the button until the 4 and tow mode indicators light up on the instrument panel. Conveyor systems on some automatic car washes may damage your vehicle. see Towing a Trailer on page 4-59. 13 in. For more information. Before using the car wash check with the manager. B- Car Washes for QUADRASTEERTM Equipped Vehicles Notice: Because your vehicle has a wider rear 13 in. track a small number of older car washes may be too narrow for your vehicle. If the tow indicator is flashing you will have to center the steering wheel by turning it to the left or right. 4-18 . it is possible the steering wheel may be slightly off -- center.

an error in judgment. or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents . 4-19 . recovery should be fairly easy. pavement markings and pavement. if there is nothing in the way. steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of A broken center line usually indicates it’s all the pavement. indicate a turn or an intersection. wait for a better time. of approaching traffic. two-lane highway waits for just the right moment. Then turn your steering wheel to go a double solid line. You can turn the steering wheel up to right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). delay your pass.” Look down the road. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move. even if the road seems empty straight down the roadway. If you can see a sign up ahead that might accelerator and then. to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or the pavement edge. A miscalculation. So here are some tips for passing: 0 “Drive ahead.the head-on collision.Off-Road Recovery Passing You may find that your right wheels have dropped off Passing the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a driving. moves around the vehicle ahead. Ease off the lines. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the Watch for traffic signs. since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. accelerates. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass. then goes back into the right lane again.

up for the distance you would lose by dropping Even though the brake lamps are not flashing. you won’t have adequate space if the in your inside mirror. Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to Check your mirrors. Keep change signal and move back into the right lane. especially if you’re following a larger enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front vehicle. make it easy for the opportunity. it back. following too closely reduces your area of the right lane to pass. wait your turn. activate your right lane vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. And if something happens to cause you to may be slowing down or starting to turn. 4-20 . back a reasonable distance. convex. cancel your pass. will have a “running start” that more than makes Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is. Also.) start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. If the way is clear to pass. Perhaps you If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle. Reconsider before passing the into the other lane. Time your move so you will be Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on increasing speed as the time comes to move two-lane roads. For start your left lane change signal before moving out one thing. you next vehicle. following driver to get ahead of you. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. When you are far of vision. you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another If you’re being passed. glance over your shoulder and pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. (Remember that if your right outside mirror is When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up. can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control If you have the Traction Assist System. Any sudden changes could cause the tires much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip to slide. try The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s your best to avoid sudden steering. and constantly seek an escape route or area of your vehicle may straighten out. remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid. ice or packed snow to spin. don’t give up. It is important to slow down on slippery care suited to existing conditions. If you do not have Let’s review what driving experts say about what this system. ice. your wheels or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a aren’t rolling. on the road to make a “mirrored surface” . A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. You may not realize the surface is slippery and lose cornering force. ease your foot off the has asked. then an acceleration happens when the three control systems (brakes. want to slow down and adjust your driving to these Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable conditions. traction is reduced when water. and by not surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and “overdriving” those conditions. acceleration three control systems. And in the acceleration until your vehicle is skidding. Keep trying to steer the vehicle to go. But skids are always vehicle control more limited. snow. a driver can lose control of the vehicle.and slow down when you have any doubt.such as enough water. While driving on a surface with reduced traction. Learn to recognize warning skid. In the steering or cornering skid. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. possible. too much throttle causes the driving wheels clues . If you start steering quickly enough. For safety. In the braking skid. you’ll In a skid. for a second skid if it occurs. or if the system is off. skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction accelerator pedal. Always be ready less danger. accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want In any emergency. Of course. too lower gear). 4-2 1 . where the tires meet the road to do what the driver If your vehicle starts to slide. gravel or other material is on the road.

The greatest of these is the terrain itself. There are no road signs. underneath the front bumper. “Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North American road system behind. rough. If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle. But it does have some definite hazards. Surfaces can be slippery. solid surface. Curves aren’t banked. series of push-pins located around the lower edge of the Off-road driving involves some new skills. The push-pins are accessible from why it’s very important that you read this guide. you’ve gone right back to nature. Also. 4-22 . Traffic lanes aren’t marked. These will help make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable. If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive. see Braking on page 4-6. In The front bumper lower air dam is held in place by a short. uphill or downhill. And that’s front bumper. You’ll find many driving tips and suggestions.Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel drive. you can easily remove the front bumper lower air dam. you shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level. Off-road driving can be great fun.

2.The following steps must be performed on each of the 3. squeeze and installed can cause improper air flowto the engine turn the expandable and may allow things like fog lamps or tow hooks end of the push-pin on the frontof your vehicle to be damaged. While continuing to pull Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended downward on the periods without the front bumper lower air dam push-pin. retainer. push-pin snaps loose. Pull the push-pins and push-pins to removethe air dam: lower air dam assembly 1. be sure to replace the air dam. though. -\ 4-23 . Insert a tool into the away from the push-pin slot and pull retainers until the lower downward until the air dam is free. Always with a tool until it be sure to replace the front bumper air dam when releases from the you’re finished off-road driving. When you’re back on roads.

Be sure the load is secured properly. how to load your vehicle. Push the flat end of the Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving /. Will you be on someone’s private land? If so. 4-24 . be sure to have all necessary maintenance retainer and push the and service work done. Be sure you read all the information about the retainer until it locks your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Check to make sure all washer portion of underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly the push-pin towards attached. Line up each push-pin There are some things to do before you go out. For with its intended example. there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you don’t know. push-pin towards the retainer until it There are some important things to remember about locks into place. Is into place. be sure to get the necessary permission. 2. so driving on the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around. making sure each is The heaviest things should be on the load floor and secure. forward of your rear axle. you should check with law enforcement people in the area.To reinstall the lower air dam do the following: Before You Go Off-Roading 1. Put heavier items as far forward as you can.

or disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning. properly.shrubs.You or your passengers could be injured. 4-25 . Put heavy loads inside the cargoarea. breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through 0 Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s streams or over soft ground).make sure all refuse is roll over. Environmental Concerns Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation. camp stoves and lanterns. obey all posted regulations. forward and low as possible. tossed about when driving over rough Avoid any driving practice that could damage terrain. not on the e Take extreme care with open fires (where roof. have been specially set aside for public off-road Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be recreational driving. You can be seriously or fatally removed from any campsite before leaving. You’ll find other important information in this manual. roads and areas that below the topof the seatbacks. center of gravity. making it more likely to Always carry a litter bag . injured if the vehicle rolls over. We recognize these concerns and urge every 0 Cargo I theloadfloorpiled I r tt I off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the seatbacks can be thrown forward the environment: 8 . trees. Keep cargo 0 Always use established trails. Keep cargo in the cargoarea as far permitted). it also raises environmental concerns. during a sudden stop. You or your passengers can be the environment . Secure the cargo . grasses struck by flying objects. However. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-56 and Tires on page 5-6 I . 0 Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system. flowers.

Traveling to Remote Areas Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving.. quick changes in direction can easily throw Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. feet and body. Your you out of position. bouncing and skills.ou . how to use it properly. especially when going is to control your speed. . hands. vehicle.. be sure to read obstacles. for example. a winch you’ll need more distance for braking. you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over Does your vehicle have a winch? If so. especially can be handy if you get stuck. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. 4-26 .. So. need to constantly sweep the terrain lose control and crash. Your ears need to listen driving on or off the road. In a remote area.. dr ng off-road. If something happens to one of them. Know the terrain and plan your in mind. At higher speeds: route. the other can help quickly. Off-road driving does require some new and different W. Try to learn of you approach things faster and you have less time any blocked or closed roads. Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness. With your arms... to scan the terrain for obstacles. You are much less likely to get bad surprises. passengers should wear safety belts. whether you’re for unexpected obstacles. Here’s what we mean. you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce. Here are some things to keep to a remote area. you and your for unusual tire or engine sounds.. But you’ll want to know since you’re on an unpaved surface. This could cause you to eyes. the winch instructions. . One of the best ways to control your vehicle It makes sense to plan your trip. It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other you have less time to react.

hole. wheel spinning. posted speed limits or Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can signal lights. you may experience slipping. poor traction and longer braking In a way. ways. There are no road signs. snow the vehicle as well or at all. grass. Ruts. bushes.accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? drinking. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass. When you drive over bumps. or ice. At the things to consider: very time you need special alertness and driving Is the path ahead clear? skills. gravel. sudden turns or sudden braking. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. You need to be familiar with the terrain hands if you’re not prepared. snow or even Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any the rise and fall of the terrain itself. alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. you can’t control hard-packed dirt.Scanning the Terrain When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain. Because you will be on an unpaved surface. or other obstacles. (There’s more discussion of these subjects later. sand. Each of these surfaces affects the steering. troughs or Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your of terrain. sliding. Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over even with one or two wheels. You have to use your own good judgment be hazardous. and its many different features. off-road driving requires a different kind of distances.) @ Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly? 4-27 . A rock. rocks. mud.or even fatal . your reflexes. delayed acceleration. rocks. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on. See Drunken Driving on page 4-3. perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. your wheels can leave the ground. log. Here are some road. rut or bump can startle about what is safe and what isn’t. you if you’re not prepared for them. Here are some things to consider. it’s acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different especially important to avoid sudden acceleration. If this happens. You Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead? could have a serious . keep a firm grip on the steering wheel.

a drop-off. don’t your path (boulders. gullies.. When you approach a hill. 0 Is there a constant incline. you can’t control your speed.Driving on Off-Road Hills incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. or will the any h. If you Are there obstructions on the hill that can block have any doubt about the steepness. surface cause tire slipping? If you drive up them. y too steep for any vehicle. You could be seriously injured or killed. Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill.. What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff. trees. no matter how well built the vehicle. descend ruts. you need to decide if it’s one Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have of those hills that’s just too steep to climb.butyou hill. Off-road driving often takes youup. On a very they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion. are sirr .. a fence? Get out and walk the hill if you don’t know. there may be a smooth. you will roll over. an embankment. logs or ruts)? drive the hill. constant . Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgmentmay not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden and an understanding ofwhatyour vehicle can and can’t by bushes. grass or do. you will stall. troughs and exposed rocks because or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a large hill. or does the hill get sharply steeper in places? Is there good traction on the hillside. won’t have to make turning maneuvers? If you drive across them. It’s the smart way to Approaching a Hill find out.downor across a the incline maygetsteeper as younearthetop. If you drive Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you down them. small hill. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven. for example.

always try to go straight up. you the hill. sideways. slow down dangerous. because you don’t want your wheels to start make you more visible to oncoming traffic. need to take some special steps. There could be a drop-off. They need. wheel. your speed. You could lose traction.. 4-29 . As you near the topof a hill. You could be seriously injured or 1 ning or driving across steep 1 s canbe killed.Driving Uphill Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill. embankment. Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. and possibly roll over.. slide and stay alert. or even another vehicle. When driving up hills. Dri~ ~ ~the to. you might want to find another route. spinning or sliding. Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill 0 Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain to let opposing traffic know you’re there. 0 Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more 0 Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills. Don’t use more power than you Use your headlamps even during the day.crest) of a hi1 t f l speed ~~ ~ i i can cause an accident. You could be seriously injured or killed. If the path twists and turns. cliff.

slowly back straight down. Turning the wheel too far to the left or it from rolling backwards. Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill. shift to Instead. it’s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around. to REVERSE (R). when going up a hill. you’ll need to forward momentum. or is 0 As you are backing down the hill. shift the transmission to go out of control. PARK (P) and restart the engine. This won’t work. release the parking brake. NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain If your engine has stopped running. Then. release the parking brake. you’ll be able to tell if your wheels A: If this happens. REVERSE (R). and there are some things you must not do. shift the transmission are about to stall. apply the parking right will increase the possibility of a rollover. 4-30 . Shift to slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE (R). Here are some things you must not do if you stall. Your vehicle restart it. release the parking brake. It’s do. If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle. and I can’t make it up the hill? on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls. you must back straight down the hill. put your left hand about to stall. Also. and REVERSE (R). This way. or If your engine is still running. and Then apply the parking brake. brake. best that you back down the hill with your First. apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. With the brake pedal pressed and the will roll backwards very quickly and you could parking brake still applied. there are some things you should are straight and maneuver as you back down. If you can’t make it up the hill. and Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R). here’s what you should do: wheels straight rather than in the left or right Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep direction.

I try to back down the Driving Downhill hill and decideI just can’t do it. Leave the vehicle control? vehicle and go get some help. What should When off-roading takes you downhill. you’ll want to I do? consider a number of things: A: Set the parking brake. Exit on the uphill What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? take if it rolled downhill. What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? -ng the tr_---sfer case to LJTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). after stalling. put your transmission in 0 How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain PARK (P) and turn off the engine. This is because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case overrides the transmission. But do not shift the transfer caseto NEUTRAL. You or someone else could be injured. Leave the transfer case in the 2 Wheel High.Q: Suppose. Boulders? Leave it in some gear. 4-31 . If you are going to leave your vehicle. Do not shift the transfer Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? case to NEUTRAL when you leavethe vehicle. set the parking brake and shift the transmission to PARK (P). 4 High or 4 Low position.

straight down..” Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade. here’s what to do. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. accident. But if it descending a hill and use a low gear to keep happens going downhill. restart the Q: Are there some things I should not do when engine.If you decide you can go down a hill safely. Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). engine drag can help your brakes steep to drive down may be too steepto drive and they won’t have to do all the work. release the parking brake.. This could cause loss of control and a serious 0: Am I likely to stall when going downhill? accident. avoid turns that take you keep your vehicle headed straight down. Apply the parking brake.. Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. then try to When driving downhill. while still braking. You could roll over if you don’t drive keeping yo1. and use a across the incline of the hill. Descend slowly. A hill that’s not too low gear. across.-’We under control at all times. Apply the brakes lightly when A: It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. get out and get help. This is called “free-wheeling. A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore and drive straight down. driving down a hill? 0 Shift back to a low gear. Shift to PARK (P) and. This way. vehicle speed under control. 4-32 . them you could lose control and have a serious If the engine won’t start.

but I hit some loose gravel and start or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip to slide downhill. a rut.Driving Across an Incline For reasons like these. etc. turn downhill. the length of the wheel base (the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble - Drivi across an inc re 1 It’s too steep will end over end. drop into a rut or depression. If you have any between the left and right wheels) may not prevent doubt about the steepness of the incline. The last vehicle to try it might have decide whether to try to drive across the incline. What should I do? sideways. your vehicle can tilt even more. you have to have to drive it. downhill. Loose gravel. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways. 4-33 . If this happens. it can hit something that will trip it (a rock. make your vehicle roll over. too steep. or if the downhill wheels is like before you drive it. Find another route instead. you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline.) and roll over. an off-road trail will probably go across the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you the incline of a hill. Surface conditions can be a problem when you Q: What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not drive across a hill. driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels. If the vehicle slips sideways. If you drive across a rock ”walk the course” so you know what the surface with the uphill wheels. When you go straight up or down a hill. Also. Here rolled over. You could be the much more narrow track width (the distance seriously injured or killed. However. 0 Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the a much better way to prevent this is to get out and incline even worse. don’t the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. But when you drive across an incline. drive across it. This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover. muddy spots. Just because Sooner or later. are some things to consider: 0 A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across.

This has an effect on steering. If the vehicle rolls over. you’ll be right in its path. Always get out on the the vehicle will take if it does roll over. Driving in Mud. When you drive on sand. You can’t accelerate as quickly. accelerating and braking. Snow or Ice When you drive in mud. Sand.turning is more difficult.the deeper the mud. In really deep mud. It’s best to use a low gear when you’rein mud . your wheels won’t get good traction. you’ll sense a change in wheel traction. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is.Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline. This will improve traction. even if the door there is harder to open. you could If you have to walk down the slope. the idea is to keep your vehicle movingso you don’t get stuck. uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. the lower the gear. stay out of the path be crushed or killed. If you get Getting out on the downhill (WN)side of a out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll vehicle stopped across an incline is over. be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill side. snow or sand. and you’ll need longer braking distances. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. 4-34 . dangerous.

And. drive slowly through it. If it’s only shallow water. Also. it’s very easy to lose control. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs. get your tailpipe under water. don’t try it . And if you do get moving. If the water isn’t too deep. or sudden thaws can weaken the dangerous. it. and flood waters demand extreme caution. 4-35 . Drive could drown. See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-38 for Find out how deepthe water is before you drive through more information on driving through water.you probably won’t get through. engine. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and downstream and you and your passengers you and your passengers could drown. for example.it can your vehicle on safe surfaces only. and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. axles or exhaust pipe. water that deepcan damage your axle and other vehicle parts. Stalling can also occur if you have difficulty accelerating. ponds or rivers can be dangerous. the traction is so poor that you will and your vehicle can stall. currents Driving through rushing water can be under the ice. On faster speeds. remember that when your brakes get wet. still wash away the ground from under your tires. Heavy rain can mean flash flooding.Hard packed snow and ice offerthe worst tire traction. you’ll never be able to start your Ammoft control. water splashes on your ignition system wet ice. Don’t drive through rushing Driving in Water water. At On these surfaces. Driving on frozenlakes. When you go through water. as long as your poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide tailpipe is under water. Underwater springs. Deep water can sweep your vehicle ice. it may take you longer to stop.

Also. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. tires and exhaust system for damage. suspension. Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off-road use. have the brake linings cleaned and checked.After Off-Road Driving Driving at Night Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody.by alcohol or drugs. After operation in mud or sand. chassis or under the hood. Check the body structure. check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage. Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. steering. or by fatigue. These accumulations can be a fire hazard. wheels. with night vision problems. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired . 4-36 .

making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.the inability to see in dim 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much light . Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. It can take a second or two. Your lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would. Glare at night is made much other vehicles. headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. But be examined regularly. Keep If you’re tired. but they also make a lot of things invisible. 4-37 . or a vehicle with Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the misaimed headlamps). Dirty glass makes Slow down. Avoid staring glare from headlamps behind you. so should your eyes No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim. lighted objects. Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. They may cut down on glare from headlamps. A night blindness . you may need to slow Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle down and keep more space between you and clean . don’t wear sunglasses at night. you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams. In remote areas. For example.inside and out. especially on higher speed roads. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. directly into the approaching headlamps. pull off the road in a safe place your eyes moving. But if you’re driving. for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.and aren’t even aware of it. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust.Here are some tips on night driving. if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. worse by dirt on the glass. When 0 Don’t drink and drive. it’s easier to pick out dimly and rest. Some drivers suffer from as we get older these differences increase. watch for animals. that way. Since you can’t see as well. What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. or even several Drive defensively seconds. slow down a little. light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

*!! It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. 4-38 . or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. the harder it is to see. pavement markings. if your tires don’t have much tread left. the edge of the road and even people walking. you can’t stop. you’ll get even less traction. And. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield. accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. The heavier the rain. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape. a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. On a wet road.

After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash. try to slow down before you hit them. Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems. apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally. The water may affect your brakes. too. 4-39 . But if you can’t. Wet b kes can cause accints. T y won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. Try to avoid puddles.

If you can see reflections If this happens. water can come in Besides slowing down. Have good tires with proper tread depth. Allow yourself more clear room slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. Never drive through water that is another vehicle. and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water. allow some extra following through your engine’s air intake and badly damage distance.Hydroplaning Driving Through Flowing Water Hydroplaning is dangerous. there could be hydroplaning. warning signs. you and other vehicle from trees. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. If ahead.not just your parking lamps -to help make you more visibleto Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep others. But it can if might at a low water crossing. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. telephone poles or other vehicles. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Driving Through Deep Standing Water Turn on your low-beam headlamps. As little as six inchesof one or more is low.~or rushing water creates strong forces. It can happen if a lot of water is flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. When your vehicle is hydroplaning. and occupants could drown. drive through them very slowly. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. as you Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. standing on the road. your vehicle can your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in be carriedaway.. And be especially careful when you pass your engine. puddles or standing water. FIOL. Don’t ignore police raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface. See Tires on page 5-6I. There 7 just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. If you try to drive through flowingwater. by road spray. and beprepared to have your viewrestricted you can’t avoid deep puddles or standingwater. 4-40 . it has little or no contact with the road.

Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities.City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: Know the best way to get to where you are going. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. See Freeway Driving on page 4-42. One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. and just before you start to move. When a light turns green. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. You’ll save time and energy. check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. Treat a green light as a warning signal. 4-41 .

Once you are on the freeway. At the entrance. you should begin to check traffic. But they have their own special rules. Then use your turn signal. Before changing lanes. Switch on your turn signal. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. freeways (also called thruways. check your mirrors. check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Just before you leave the lane. turnpikes or superhighways) are the shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in safest of all roads. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Mile for mile. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.Freeway Driving The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. parkways. your “blind” spot. 4-42 . Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. glance quickly over your expressways.

Try to be well rested. e Weather Forecasts: What’sthe weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a Before Leaving on a Long Trip short time to avoid a major storm system? Make sure you’re ready. it’s ready to go. 4-43 .such as after a day’s work . Is the tread good enough for to your sense of motion. under any circumstances. Other Fluids: Have you checked on to the next exit. you’ll find experienced and able service experts in dealerships all across North America. not trouble-free trip. e Tires: They are vitally important to a safe. all levels? The exit ramp can be curved. move to the 0 Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? proper lane well in advance.don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. you may tend to think you are recommended pressure? going slower than you actually are. 0 Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? The exit speed is usually posted. stop and back up. sometimes quite sharply.Once you are moving on the freeway. After driving for any distance long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the at higher speeds. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in. make certain you Here are some things you can check before a trip: allow a reasonable following distance. all windows clean inside and outside? When you want to leave the freeway. If it needs service. Expect to e Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservior full? Are move slightly slower at night. If you e Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? must start when you’re not fresh . is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained. Reduce your speed according to your speedometer. do not. Drive e Fuel. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it. Of course. Engine Oil. If you miss your exit. have it done before starting out.

be aware that it can happen. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First. or both. with a comfortably cool interior. instruments frequently. For safety.Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis. treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery. lack of awareness. Scan the road ahead and Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from to the sides. 4-44 . Then here are some tips: Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated. your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second. e Keep your eyes moving. Check your mirrors and your driving in flat or rolling terrain. service or parking area and take a nap. If you get sleepy. pull off the road into a rest. and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. or whatever. along with the hum of the tires on the road. and you could crash and be injured. the drone of the engine. get some exercise.

or if you’re planning to visit there. the slowing down. You could crash. If you don’t shift down. You could crash. Check all fluid to do all the workof slowing down. cooling system get so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. Shiftto a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill. could be something in your lane. and you can climb the hill better. going down a hill. Don’t swing wide or then have poor braking or even none going cut across the center of the road. Shift down to let that let you stay in your own lane. 4-45 . These parts can work hard would then have poor braking or even none on mountain roads. your brakes could get e Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. your engine assist your brakes on a steep e As you go over the top of a hill. tires. Your brakes will have Keep your vehicle in good shape. Always Know how to go down hills. You would roads in hills or mountains. See Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on page 4-22 for information aboutdriving off-road. Drive at speeds down a hill. The most important have your engine running and your vehiclein thing to know is this: let your engine do some of gear when you go downhill. There downhill slope. Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. be alert. like a stalled car or an accident. e Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. They could levels and also the brakes. here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission.If you drive regularly in steep country. You and transmission.

You may see highway signs on mountains that Here are some tips for winter driving: warn of special problems. Include an ice scraper. Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time. you can have a very slippery situation. some winter outer clothing. Examples are long Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. include a small bag of sand. if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road. a rag. And. 4-46 . passing or no-passing zones. your vehicle. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful. a small shovel. a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. grades. a small brush or broom. if you will be driving under severe conditions. a Winter Driving supply of windshield washer fluid. Be alert to these and take You may want to put winter emergency supplies in appropriate action. However. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. a failing rocks area or winding roads. a flashlight.

Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow - drive with caution.
If you have traction assist, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on
a slippery road. But you can turn the traction system off
if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
on page 4-50.Even though your vehicle has a traction
system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving
to the road conditions. See Traction Assist System
(TAS) on page 4-9.
If you don’t have a traction system, accelerate gently.
Try not to break the gentle traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.

4-47

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system,
you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
e Turn on your hazard flashers.

4-48

Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
0 Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make Snow can trap exhaust gases under ! J r
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon
floor mats - anything you can wrap around monoxide) gas t o get inside. CO could
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. overcome you and kill you.You can’t see it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. heater run for a while.

4-49

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help If you ~- 1 your tires spin at I..,.. ;pe--, they
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do can explode, and you or others could be
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until injured. And, the transmission or other partsof
help comes. the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or otherdamage.
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, When you’re stuck, spin the wheelsas little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above25 mph
Ice or Snow (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
use caution. back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-68.

4-50

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out Using the Recovery Hooks
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a
four-wheel-drivevehicle, shift into 4HI or 4LO. If
your vehicle has the Traction Assist System, you should
turn it off by pressing the TAS on/off button. If your
vehicle has the Stabilitrak@ System,turn the
Stabilitrak@ Systemoff by pressing the
Stabilitrak@button so that the STABILITY SYS
DISABLED and TRACTION OFF lights are illuminated
on the instrument panel cluster. Then shift back and
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheelsin theforward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that doesn't get you out
after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you
can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has
them. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. The
Vehicle on page 4-53.
hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You
may need to use them if you're stuck off-road and need
to be pulled to some place where you can continue
driving.

4-51

These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight
out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
' The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.

Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.

4-52

Towing Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
e What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Towing Your Vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if recommendations.
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See e How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6. restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle e Do you have the proper towing equipment?
for recreational purposes (suchas behind a motorhome), See your dealer or trailering professional for
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. additional advice and equipment recommendations.
e Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
Recreational Vehicle Towing would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome. towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-43.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your Dinghy Towing
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and ”dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on When towing your vehicle, turn the ignition to LOCK.
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”). Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
With the proper preparation and equipment, many Two-wheel-drive vehicles, should not be towed with all
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
Towing” and “Dolly Towing”, following. transmissions have no provisions for internal ltibrication
while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four
wheels off the ground.

4-53

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles 3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
4. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for your
vehicle.

"1
n
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the following
vehicle.
6. - .-- the i{ ion 9 .

I

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle: roll even if the transmission is in Park (P). You
1. Firmly set the parking brake. or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
transfer case to NEUTRAL.

4-54

Dolly Towing 4. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for the proper
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for
Two-wheel-drive, vehicles, should not be towed with the your vehicle.
rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive 5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication being towed is firmly attached to the following
while being towed. to properly tow these vehicles, vehicle.
they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four
wheels off the ground. 6. Turn the ignition off.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
If your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak@it is not
designed to be dolly towed. If you need to tow your I
vehicle, see “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section. Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle: case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P). You
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
or others could be injured. Make sure the
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P). parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
tow vehicle. I

4-55

Loading Your Vehicle on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
\
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
GAWR FRT GAWR RR Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle,or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
The Certificationflire label also contains information
about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. See “Front
Axle Reserve Capacity” later in this section.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.

;EE ~ N E R ’ MANUAL
S FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION^ I
\ 1

10 noi bad your ve---;le an, ~ vie-..lanthe
GVWR, or either the maximum tront or rear
The Certificationflire label is found on the rear edge of GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
the driver’s door or in the Incomplete Vehicle break, and it can change the way your vehicle
Document in the cab.
handles. These could cause you to lose
The label shows the size of your original tires and the control and crash. Also, overloading can
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight shorten the life of your vehicle.
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle,-all occupants, fuel and cargo. Notice: Yourwarrantydoesnotcoverpartsor
The Certificationnire label also tells you the maximum components that fail because of overloading.
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross The label will help you decide how much cargo and
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads installed equipment your truck can carry.
4-56

In a the vehicle to the proper height. If the loaded vehicle is not moved for approximately 0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in twelve hours. If you put things inside your vehicle . or anything else . inside the vehicleso that some of them are above the topsof the seats. like suitcases. while the vehicle is being driven. 4-57 . This can be especially apparent if a your vehicle.2 km) of driving for the Try to spread the weight evenly. the leveling system may bleed down to a lower height.like suitcases. This type of level control will provide a leveled riding Things you put inside your vehicle can strike position as well as improved handling under a variety of and injure people in a sudden stop or turn. they’ll keep going. trailer is left attached to a parked vehicle for long periods 0 When you carry something inside the of time. conditions. based on inputs from the road surface. A hydraulic pump in a crash. See ”Loading Your Vehicle dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. secure it whenever you can. The vehicle must be driven to re-level the vehicle. trunk. leveling to complete. vehicle. It takes approximately 2 miles (3. packages.Using heavier suspension components to getadded There’s also important loading information for off-road durability might not change your weight ratings. depending on the road surface 0 Never stack heavier things. or passenger and loading conditions. If a self-equalizing hitch is being used. tools. Ask your driving in this manual.they go as fast Level Control as the vehicle goes. for Off-Road Driving” in the Index. If you have to stop or turn quickly. put themas far forward as you can.2 km) with the trailer prior to adjusting (leveling) the hitch. the vehicle should be driven approximately 2 miles (3. or if there is a --7sh. inside each rear shock absorber raises the rear of Put things in the trunkof your vehicle. Self-Adjusting The self-adjusting rear suspension is available on C/K 1500 vehicles and is available with the premium smooth ride suspension package.

The controller then sends signals to each shock shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle absorber to independently adjust the damping level to to maintain proper vehicle height. The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to when engaged. will provide additional control of the ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned off. If a self-equalizing hitch is being used. shock absorbers. wheel handling under a variety of passenger and loading to body position.Automatic Level Control AutorideTM The automatic level control rear suspension is available The AutorideTMfeature will provide a superior vehicle on C/K 1500 vehicles and comes as a part of the ride and handling under a variety of passenger and AutorideTM suspension. This type of level control is fully automatic and will The system is fully automatic and uses a computer provide a better leveled riding position as well as better controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed. it is recommended to allow the shocks to inflate. loading conditions. AutorideTMalso interacts with the tow/haul switch that. thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch. IiWdive and steering position of the conditions. The system is provide the optimum vehicle ride. An air compressor connected to the rear vehicle. This additional control results in better You may hear the air compressor operating when ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is the height is being adjusted. loaded or towing a trailer. 4-58 . activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter. See Tow/Hau/ Mode Light on page 3-50 for more information.

Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the a trailer with your vehicle. It doesn’t included the weight of the people inside. if the trailer is too Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached. If you don’t use the correct equipment and The total cargo load must not be more than your drive properly. To pull a trailer correctly. pull a trailer. your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. so that you heavy. Pull a trailer only if you have spring bars in place. (68 kg) for each seat. If you are using at all. Additional rear axle maintenance is required for a vehicle used to tow a trailer. You and your passengers could be a weight-distributinghitch. and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes. and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. see Towing a Trailer on page 4-59 Nofice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage Towing a Trailer.See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. To identify the vehicle trailering capacity of your vehicle. But you can figure about 150 Ibs. 4-59 . followed all the steps in this section. weight of your load the right way. CWR is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry. weigh the vehicle without the seriously injured. follow the advice in this part. For more information. you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. the brakes may not work well or even-- won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. For example. you can lose control when you vehicle’s CWR.Trailer Recommendations Towi r l a Trailer You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) for your vehicle.

as many are. don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. here are some important points: this section. engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at important trailering tips and safety rules. not only where you live the weight of the trailer. e Don’t tow a trailer atall during the first 500 miles it’s ready for heavier trailers. 0 Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh less than 5. Trailering means axle or other parts could be damaged. (2 270 kg). these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in If you do. if necessary. Many of the heavier loads. So please read this section carefully before e You can tow in DRIVE (D).g. under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). and e Then. changes in handling.000 Ibs. safe trailering takes correct equipment.. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. durability and fuel economy. You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 5. than just driving your vehicle by itself. (2 270 kg). a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer too often (e. You may want to shift you pull a trailer.If yours was built with trailering options. including speed limit Three important considerations have to do with weight: restrictions.000 Ibs. and the weight on your vehicle’s tires. the transmission to THIRD (3) or. having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal. But trailering is different (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. In it are many time-tested. e There are many different laws. A good source for the weight of the trailer tongue this information can be state or provincial police. 4-60 . tow a trailer. during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you it has to be used properly. Successful. but also where you’ll be driving. Your engine. This helps your That’s the reason for this part.

The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul every time it is started. When the button is pressed. 4-61 . tow/haul mode is to: Tow/haul is most useful under the following driving 0 Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability conditions: of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy a large or heavy load. However. Your vehicle may be equipped with vehicle is unloaded. when pressed. Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or Your vehicle may be equipped with a button at the end with no trailer at all will not cause damage. Tow/haul information. Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when load in stop and go traffic. Tow/haul may be turned off by pressing the button again. See AutoriderM on page 4-58 for more characteristics and reduced fuel economy. trailer or a large or heavy load. enables there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when the tow/haul. at which time the indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off. 0 When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy 0 Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring load in busy parking lots where improved low less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy speed control of the vehicle is desired. Such a selection when unloaded AutorideTM which further improves your vehicle’s ride @ may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving while towing. the vehicle is unloaded.Tow/Haul Mode Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of Tow/haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR! trailer or a large or heavy load. tow/haul has been selected. a light on the is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that large or heavy load. load through rolling terrain. The purpose of the See Weight of the Trailer later in this section. of the shift lever which.

000 Ibs. 4-62 . (5 448 kg) 6. (3 039 kg) 7. based upon your vehicle How heavy can a trailer safely be? model and options. (4 994 kg) 12. (5 902 kg) (SuburbanNukon XL) 8.700 Ibs. road grades. (6 356 kg) I Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the trailer weight up to 1.000 Ibs. And. it can also depend equipment.000 Ibs. It depends on how you plan to use your rig. speed.000 Ibs.700 Ibs. Weight of the Trailer Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh.700 Ibs. 1 5300 V8 6.700 Ibs.400 Ibs. (5 902 kg) 00 V8 5300 kg) (3 356 13. I Vehicle* I Axle Ratio I Maximum Trailer Weight I GCWR I C-1500 (2WD)* I 4800 V8 5. (3 kg) 810 14. passengers and cargoin the tow vehicle on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.000 Ibs (454 kg). must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. (2 585 kg) (3 039 kg) 11. outside driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull trailering equipment.000 Ibs. altitude. (5 448 kg) 13.000 Ibs. The weight of additional optional a trailer are all important. For Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the example. (3 492 kg) 12.

10 I 12. (6 356 kg) on vehicles with 283 suspension. (681 kg) maximum. (4 717 kg) I 17.200 Ibs. (4 630 kg) 16. (3 583 kg) trailer 4-63 . (6 356 kg) (SuburbanNukon XL)t 10. **GCWR limited to 14.900 Ibs. Vehicle" Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight I GCWR K-1500 (4 WD)* 4800 V8 5300 V8 Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the trailer weight up to 1. (7 718 kg) I (Suburban/YukonXL)t I 4.400 Ibs. I Vehicle* I Axle Ratio I Maximum Trailer Weight I GCWR I C-2500 (2WD)* 6000 V8 8.600 Ibs. t2500 SuburbanNukon XL (ZWD) equipped with 283 base suspension limited to 7.500 Ibs. (7 264 kg)** 1 6000 V8 wI4WS 7. (3 722 kg) 14. 356 (6 kg) *Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1. (5 448 kg) I 14.000 Ibs.000 Ibs. (6 350 kg) 16.000 Ibs.600 Ibs.000 Ibs.200 Ibs. 000 Ibs (7 257 kg) I 8100 V8 I 3.000 Ibs.000 Ibs. (4354 kg) 14.000 Ibs (454 kg).000 Ibs.73 I 10. (3447 kg) 9.

000 Ibs.000 Ibs.100 Ibs.73 7. 000 Ibs (7 257 kg) 8100 V8 3.73 7.300 Ibs.000 Ibs. The GCWR for your vehicle to measure because it affects the total or gross weight should not be exceeded. And if you will tow a trailer.500 Ibs.600 Ibs. write to: for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. too. of your vehicle. See Loading Your Vehicle In Canada. (3 447 kg) 14.000 Ibs.000 Ibs. (6 350 kg) 4. (4 581 kg) 17. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle. t2500 SuburbanNukon XL (4WD) equipped with 283 base suspension limited to 7. and the people who will be riding in advice.600 Ibs. (6 356 kg) (SuburbanNukon XL)t 4. carrying that weight. (3 586 ka) trailer The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the Weight of the Trailer Tongue total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers.000 Ibs.1 0 9.10 9.10 12. (7 718 kg) 4. you must add your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be Booklet.300 Ibs. (8 626 kg) *Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1. (5 448kg) 19. or you can write us at the address listed in the vehicle. Ontario L I H 8P7 4-64 . 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa.900 Ibs.73 10.000 V8 w/4WS 3. General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre.000 Ibs. (7 264 kg)** 6. The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight equipment and conversions. (4 354kg) 16. (4 218kg) 16. cargo. (6 356 kg) on vehicles with 283 suspension. any cargo you You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or may carry in it. (3 31 1 kg) 14. Vehicle* I Ratio Axle I Maximum Trailer Weight I GCWR K-2500 (4WD\* 6000 V8 3. (681 kg) **GCWR limited to 14.

After you’ve loaded your trailer. If they aren’t. Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. This trailer. you may be able to get them use a properly mounted. You’ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see Tire Loading for more information. large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. If you use a weight distributing hitch. weigh the trailer and If you’ll be pulling a trailer that. the trailer tongue weight(A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). Crosswinds. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle. separately. weight-distributing right simply by moving some items around in the hitch and sway control of the proper size. make sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight distribution spring bars. including the weight of the trailer tongue. equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you’re driving.000 Ibs (2 270 kg) be sure to are proper. Make sure you have for your vehicle. will then the tongue. If you use a step-bumper hitch. A E3 Hitches It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. to see if the weights weigh more than 5. 4-65 . your bumper could Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight be damaged in sharp turns. ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper. Here If you’re using a weight-carrying or aweight-distributing are some rules to follow: hitch. when loaded.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install. Use steel chain. If won’t work well.000 Ibs. too. Will you have to make any holes in the body of Trailer Brakes your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If your trailer weighs more than 2. You should always attach safety chains between your Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s vehicle and your trailer. But don’t use copper tubing for this. you may attach the safety chains to the attaching If everything checks out this far. then be sure to seal the holes later when loaded.02 cubic inches (0. (900 kg) If you do. then it needs its own brakes . Otherwise. If you don’t seal them. the hitch. If your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak@. If you are towing with the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid an aftermarket hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn brake tubing. on page 2-40 Dirt and water can. with your rig. your trailer Safety Chains cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. both braking systems safety chains to the attaching points on the bumper. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. adequate. following the trailer or hitch to the rear brakes.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s a factory-installed step bumper. See Engine Exhaust adjust and maintain them properly.000 Ibs (2 270 kg) with 0. it will bend and finally break off. Cross the safety chains hydraulic brake system only if: under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue The trailer parts can withstand 3. make the brake tap at point on the hitch platform. can get into your vehicle. You could even lose your brakes. you may attach the master cylinder. The trailer’s brake system will use less than If you are towing a trailer up to 5. you are towing a trailer up to your vehicle’s trailer rating limit.000 psi from contacting the road if it becomes separated from (20 650 kPa) of pressure.and they must be you remove the hitch. manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety If you do. 4-66 .

safety chains. (and attachments). brakes are still working. To maximize your safety then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be when towing a trailer: sure the brakes are working. 4-67 . See “Engine electric brakes. If the trailer has unconsciousness or death. a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. check the trailer hitch and platform monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. Before setting out for the open road. tires and mirror adjustment. If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening. You can’t see or smell CO. pull a trailer with your vehicle. start your vehicle and trailer moving and Exhaust” in the Index. Do not use the comfort control setting for maximum air because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle. drive with your front. main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed. and make necessary repairs before During your trip. load is secure. and that the lamps and any trailer Keep the rear-most windows closed. electrical connector. carbon Before you start. you’ll want to get to know your rig. Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as If you have a rear-most window open and you responsive as your vehicle is by itself. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. check occasionally to be sure that the starting on your trip. outside air into your vehicle. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. It can cause lamps. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index. This will bring fresh.

longer. Your vehicle could be damaged. curbs. move your When towing a trailer. 4-68 . Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders. road signs. Signal well in you’re towing a trailer. are burned out. it’s if you use it while backing your trailer the same rules important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer apply. However. Properly hooked up. to the left. will respond more quickly and it may take additional practice to get used to backing up with four-wheel steering. panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer have someone guide you. you may think drivers behind If your vehicle is equipped with four-wheel steering and you are seeing your signal when they are not. with four-wheel steering your rig bulbs are still working. To move the trailer to the right. When you’re turning with a trailer. And. to move the trailer to the left. change lanes or stop. just move that hand you’re about to turn. Avoid heavy braking and sudden turns. if possible. making very sharp turns while trailering. make wider turns Passing than normal. telling other drivers Then. could cause the trailer to come in contact with the This can help you avoid situations that require vehicle. the arrows on your instrument hand to the right. because you’re a good deal advance. Thus. you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer Backing Up The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. the trailer lamps will also flash. trees or other objects.Following Distance Making Turns Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Always back up slowly and.

similar to engine overheating. your vehicle may show signs wheels. See "Tow/Haul Mode" for more information. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill. Have someone place chocks under the trailer on steep uphill grades. Apply your regular brake. here's how to do it: When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades. let the 3. Then apply your few minutes before turning the engine off. you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. 4-69 .. see Engine Overheating on page 5-30. If you do get parking brake and shift into PARK (P). If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude 2. Reapply the regular brakes.g. on a hill. under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). the overheat warning. your rig could start to move. To avoid this. with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a 4. If you don't shift down. trailer can be damaged. You really shouldnoarkyour vehic . You may want to shift the trailer attached. and both your vehicle and the (e. but don't shift into consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower PARK (P) yet. You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the transmission shifts too often. w I a You can tow in DRIVE (D).Driving On Grades Parf-3g on '"11s Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. When the wheel chocks are in place. temperature than at normal altitudes. a lower wrong. If something goes transmission to THIRD (3) or. if necessary. People gear selection if the transmission shifts too often can be injured. 1. release the engine run while parked (preferably on level ground) regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

the parking brake firmlyset. 4..OL. use the steps that follow. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down 6. 4-70 . shift into a gear. Let up on the brake pedal.not in sure the transfer caseis in a drive NEUTRAL. can move suddenly._. even when you’re on fairly level ground. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle. and release the parking brake. while you: start your engine. your vehicle will be free to roll. is in PARK (P). Your vehicle 3. You or others could be injured. Release the regular brakes.. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. It can be dan. __ =-. Stop and have someone pick up and store the If you have left the engine running.So. Parking on a Hill 1. can roll. be even if your shift lever gear -. e if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with 2.>f your c _. 5. If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles is in NEUTRAL. be sure the When You Are Ready to Leave After transfer case is in a drive gear and not in NEUTRAL. Always put the shift lever fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset.-roL. the vehicle chocks. To be sure your vehicle won’t move.

engine oil. is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector available through your dealer. If you’re trailering. axle lubricant. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Each of these is covered in this manual. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill). belts. it’s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip. 4-71 . The trailer wiring harness. with a seven-pin connector. and the Index will help you find them quickly. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Trailer Wiring Harness Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring harnesses for towing a trailer. cooling system and brake system.Maintenance When Trailer Towing Basic Trailer Wiring Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer.

4-72 .The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer Trailer Wiring Harness Package circuits: Yellow:Left Stop/Turn Signal DarkGreen: Right Stop/Turn Signal Brown: Taillamps White:Ground LightGreen:Back-upLamps Red: Battery Feed Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform.

If your step-bumper has only one cutout circle. you will have to cut out the circle. you must push out the center can get a jumper harness (electric trailer brake control) cutout circle to install with a trailer battery feed fuse from your dealer. you can also get an adapter. harness and fuse should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center. then remove it to install the trailer ball. 4-73 . If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard four-way round pin connector. DarkBlue: Trailer Brake and your step-bumper has three cutout circles you If your trailer is equipped with electronic brakes. DarkGreen:Right Stopnurn Signal Step-Bumper Pad @ Brown: Taillamps Your vehicle has a rear step bumper with a rear step @ White:Ground pad at the center of the bumper.The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer Power Winches circuits: If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle. only @ Yellow:Left Stopflurn Signal use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored. @ LightGreen:Back-upLamps If you will be using the 0 Red: BatteryFeed bumper to tow a trailer. This the trailer ball.

.PZX NOTES 4-74 .

... 5-25 Ti res...................... 5. 5...........Tire Pressure .............................................. 5-64 Cooling System .........................27 Inflation .............................................................. 5......................5 All-Wheel Drive ... 5................ 5-38 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................................6 Additives ...................................... 5-4 Brakes ............. 5............... 5..........................................52 California Fuel ..................... 5-8 Halogen Bulbs ........................... 5-38 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........ 5-40 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Battery ................................ 5-30 When It Is Time for New Tires .................56 Hood Release ...................... 5.........65 Power Steering Fluid .................................................. 5-33 Buying New Tires ........................................................ 5....64 Engine Fan Noise ..... 5-45 Fuel ........... 5-7 Bulb Replacement ...... Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Service ......................................... 5.................... 5....................................4 Jump Starting ........5-30 Tire Inspection and Rotation ............. 5........ 5-11 Front Turn Signal......................... 5.................. -5-12 Side Identification Marker Lamps .........................51 Gasoline Specifications ................. 5..........14 Taillamps ...........3 Windshield Washer Fluid ......................................................................62 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ......................................................................62 Engine Overheating .................................................. 5-9 Headlamps .................................. 5..................................... -5-44 Vehicle .... 5..........................58 Engine Oil .................. 5........................................ 5......54 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ......................... Sidemarker and Daytime Checking Things Under Running Lamps .................... 5...... 5...................54 Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................5............................56 Engine Compartment Overview .................. 5-6 Four-wheel Drive ........................50 Gasoline Octane ...................................12 Roof Marker Lamps ...................................................... 5......................................................... 5....................................................... 5-55 the Hood ........... 5-22 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .............60 Automatic Transmission Fluid .......... 5...................................................... 5-17 Replacement Bulbs .......................................................59 Engine Air CleanedFilter .......... 5-39 Doing Your Own Sewice Work .....5 Rear Axle ..........54 Filling Your Tank ....................................6 1 Engine Coolant .................................. 5....... 5........................5-66 5-1 .................53 Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol) .......................................................................... 5-6 Front Axle .............

........................................91 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ................................ 5-106 Sheet Metal Damage .........5-109 Chemical Paint Spotting .. 5..................................................................5-109 Underbody Maintenance ............... 5-93 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .............................................. 5-69 Service Parts Identification Label ................................................ 5.................. 5-93 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 5-94 5-2 ....... 5....... 5......... 5-93 Finish Damage .......5-97 Care of Safety Belts .................. 5-96 Changing a Flat Tire .... 5-87 Add-on Electrical Equipment ......................5-96 If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 5-106 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ......................94 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......97 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................. Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Wheel Replacement ..................................................67 Vehicle Identification ............................ 5-88 Power Windows and Other Power Options .......... 5-70 Electrical System ........................................68 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..........................................................................97 Appearance Care . 5............................. 5..... 5...91 Capacities and Specifications ............................................................... 5-97 Spare Tire ......... 5-97 Weatherstrips ....................... 5.5-91 Capacities and Specifications .88 Windshield Wiper Fuses .................................. 5-96 Tire Chains ..........

5-3 . Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. You'll get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.Service We hope you'll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. We hope you'll go to your dealer for all your service needs.

parts canlater break or fall off.Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work. Be sure you have sufficient knowledge. If you use the wrong fasteners. “English” and “metric” perform. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. you’ll want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. fasteners can be easily confused. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-18. maintenance task. To order the proper service manual. Before attempting experience. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list Be sure to use the proper nuts. You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe see Service Publications Ordering Information on damaged if you try to do service work on a page 7-I I. bolts and the mileage and the date of any service work you other fasteners. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. You could be hurt. Your vehicle has an air bag system. the proper replacement parts to do your own service work. Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. see Servicing Your Air and tools before you attemptany vehicle Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-79. vehicle without knowing enough aboutit. 5-4 .

you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or necessary. If the octane is less than 87.3L V8 (VIN Code T). A little pinging noise when you accelerate (VIN) on page 5-96. In all service.Fuel Gasoline Octane Gasoline Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher. If this shows the code letter or number that identifies your occurs. See Vehicle identification Number your engine. fuel and hear heavy knocking. This does not If your vehicle has the 5. your engine needs also see Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-7. you may The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN) get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. including the 5. 5-5 .3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is only). use only regular unleaded gasoline. Otherwise. or drive uphill is considered normal. you might damage instrument panel. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E-85). You will find the VIN at the top left of the soon as possible. use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as engine. other engines.

return to your authorized GM dealer for label on the pump. it Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the is designed to operate on fuels that meet California Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better specifications. repairs may not be covered by your warranty. You should not have to add anything to your Canada Only fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates. Gasoline adopting California emissions standards. and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. look for the and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. allowing your emission control system to work ~~ properly. your vehicle meeting these specifications could provide improved will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal driveability and emission control system performance specifications. Additives To provide cleaner air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines. diagnosis. turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-46 ) In Canada. The malfunction indicator lamp may compared to other gasoline. If this “Auto Makers’ Choice” occurs. but emission control system performance may be affected. 5-6 . If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used. If this fuel is not available in states vehicle performance and engine protection.Gasoline Specifications California Fuel It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission which were developed by the American Automobile Standards (see the underhood emission control label). particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier. such as ethers and ethanol. all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming.

instrument panel. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel (E-85) pump available. 5-7 . ask the attendant where you buy gasoline ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E-85). See Vehicle ldenfificafion Number Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low (VIN) on page 5-96. you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or (MMT). Fuels the 5. S.nrel. return to your authorized GM dealer for service. whether the fuel contains MMT.Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. General Motors does also see Fuel on page 5-5. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greafer than 85%. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN) system and also damage theplastic and rubber shows the code letter or number that identifies your parts.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z called methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl only). emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine be affected. Those stations that do have E-85 should have a label indicating ethanol content. The U. use only regular unleaded containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and gasoline. the performance of the emission control system may Only vehicles that have the 5. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your engine.3L V8 (VIN Code T). You will find the VIN at the top left of the warranty. Your vehicle may not operate properly if the ethanol content is greater than 85%. (VIN Code Z) may use 85% ethanol fuel (E-85). Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website (http://afdcmap. Don’t use fuel containing Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol) methanol. including not recommend the use of such gasolines. In all other engines.gov/nreI/) that can help you find E-85 fuel. If this occurs.

so you’ll need to refill your fuel tank more often when using If you plan on driving in another country outside the E-85 than when you’re using gasoline. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel tank may improve starting. see Loading not recommended in the previous text on fuel. E-85 should meet ASTM Notice: Some additives are not compatible with Specification D 5798. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your for good starting and heater efficiency below 32°F (OOC). the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more than 70% ethanol. For to find. the proper fuel may be hard gasoline is recommended when pulling a trailer. E-85 fuel and may harm your fuel system. the E-85 fuel your new vehicle warranty. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel payload capacity with ethanol fuel. or contact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you’ll be driving. 5-8 . Fuels in Foreign Countries E-85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline. Costly Your Vehicle on page 4-56. contains methanol. If this happens. ask an auto club. it may be because your E-85 fuel is Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that not properly formulated for your climate. Don’t use fuel containing switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel methanol. repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. To check the fuel availability. parts. warranty. Your vehicle is designed to system and also damage the plastic and rubber accommodate a mixture of gasoline and E-85 fuel. starting on E-85. Damage caused by additives wouldn’t be covered by To insure quick starts in the wintertime. Regular unleaded United States or Canada. Don’t use additives with must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798.At a minimum. If you have trouble E-85 fuel.

Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refueling your vehicle.Filling Your Tank Fuel vapor is highly flammable. flames and smoking materials away from fuel. The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. 5-9 . and that can cause very bad injuries. It burns violently. Keep sparks.

Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted While refueling. Then unscrew the cap all the way. Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full. turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). 5-10 . you could be badly burned. and is more likely in hotweather. To remove the fuel cap. See Cleaning the Outside the hook located on the inside of the filler door. hang the fuel cap by the tether using surfaces as soon as possible. If you get fuel on yourself and then something ignites it. of Your Vehicle on page 5-91.

See “Malfunction lndicator Lamp” in Dispense gasoline only into approved the Index. If you get the wrong type. this would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground. 0 Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline. Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle. containers.When you put the fuel cap back on. If you need a new fuel cap. Static electricity discharge from the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. in a vehicle’s trunk. 5-1 1 . Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in Notice. be sure to get your vehicle.nt. Make ~ sure you fully install the cap. it may not fit properly. Contact should be maintained until the fillingis complete. turn it to the right Fi”’ng a PC . Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. See Malfunction lndicator Lamp on page 3-46. ‘)le Fu ’ C . To help avoid injury to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions you and others: system. You can be badly burned and your vehicle This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to damaged if this occurs.‘ner (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has beenleft off or improperly installed.

Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.Checking Things Under Hood Release the Hood To open the hood do the following: 1. and plastic or rubber. 5-12 . brake fluid. These include liquids like fuel. rts and start a fire. coolant. Things that burn can get on hot engine .You or others could be burned. windshield washer and other fluids. oil. Pull the handle inside the vehicle located under and to the left of the steering wheel.

Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the secondary hood release located near the center of the grill. 5-13 . 2. Pull down the hood and close it firmly. Lift the hood. Before closing the hood. be sure all filler caps are on properly. 3.

Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the VORTEC 5300 V8 engine (VORTEC 4800 and 6000 V8 engines similar). you'll see the following: I 5-14 .

Automatic Transmission Dipstick L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter H. Fan N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir 5-15 . Battery G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal D. Engine Oil Dipstick K. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped) J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir C. Remote Negative (-j Terminal (GND) B. Underhood Fuse Block F. Coolant Surge Tank I.Engine Oil Fill M. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir E.A.

When you open the hood on the VORTEC 8100 V8 engine you’ll see the following: 5-16 .

E. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped) instrument cluster. Engine Oil Fill DiC Warnings and Messages on page 3-62.Fan You should check your engine oil level regularly. Coolant Surge Tank If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the C. Battery N. I.Engine Oil Dipstick your engine oil level right away. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir 5-17 . Remote Positive (+) Terminal J. Remote Negative (-) Terminal (GND) an added reminder. this is H. it means you need to check D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir K.UnderhoodFuseBlock M. Brake Master Fluid Reservoir L.A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Engine Oil B. Automatic Transmission Dipstick For more information. G. see “CHECK OIL LEVEL” under F.

The engine oil dipstick has a yellow ring handle and is located in the engine compartment on the passenger's side of the vehicle. It's a good idea to check your engine oil every time you keeping the tip down. ~ All Other Engines 5-18 . the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. Remove it again. and check the level. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-74for more information on location.1 L Engine Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don't. In order to get an accurate reading. 8. then push it back in all the way. get fuel.Checking Engine Oil Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth.

Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through. on the explains what kind of oil to use. then you’ll need to add at least one engine is located on the quart of oil. page 5. your engine could be damaged.When to Add Engine Oil The engine oil fill cap for the VORTEC 4800. This part engine valve cover. Your vehicle may have a cap with text and a graphic. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range. 5-19 . or just a graphic as shown. Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. see Capacities and Specifications on vehicle. 5300. Notice: Don’t add too much oil. For engine oil crankcase passenger’s side of the capacity.106. But you must use the right kind. If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip 6000 and 8100 V8 of the dipstick. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more information on location.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle. be sure the oil you use has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE1OW-40. If you have your oil changed for you.What Kind of Engine Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the starburst symbol. Do not use HOT any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol. SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADEOIL NOT RECOMMENDED 5-20 . as shown in the viscosity chart. be sure the oil put into your engine is American L Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines. WEATHER 7If youchoose to perform I the engine oil change service yourself.

Starburst symbol. Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you stop for fuel. Based on driving conditions. If the system is ever reset accidentally. where the system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary temperature falls below -20°F (-29"C). 5-21 . at extremely low temperatures. starburst symbol. the oil life If you are in an area of extreme cold. such as the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can SAE IOW-40 or SAE 2OW-50 under any conditions. Failure to use the recommended When the system has calculated that oil life has been oil can result in engine damage not covered by diminished. You should look for and use only oils which have the API Life SystemTM) Starburst symbol and which are also identified as Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know SAE 5W-30. if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C) and not on mileage. The recommended oils whenever the oil is changed. It is also important to easier cold starting and better protection for your engine check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. if your vehicle. it is for over a year. vary considerably. It is possible that. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for come on. However. Remember to reset the oil life system Don't add anything to your oil. with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. when to change the engine oil and filter. you are driving under the best conditions. necessary. SAE 5W-30 is the When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil only viscosity grade recommended for yourvehicle. it will indicate that an oil change is your warranty.As in the chart shown previously. Both will provide the system must be reset. you must Engine Oil Additives change your oil at 3.000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. or above. your engine oil and filter recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 must be changed at least once a year and at this time synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. you must reset the system every time the oil is Notice: Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines changed. This is you can use an SAE IOW-30 oil which has the API based on engine revolutions and engine temperature. For the oil life system to work properly. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils. Do not use other viscosity grade oils.

your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three taking it to a place that collects used oil. pouring it on the ground. be sure to drain all the oil from the following: filter before disposal. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-14 for more information on location. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. Never dispose of oil by putting it 1. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or situation occurs where you can change your oil prior to rags containing used engine oil. or a good calculate when the next oil change is required. The air cleaner/filter indicator is located on the air cleaner cover. reset the system so it can your skin and nails with soap and water. the system is reset. reset the system. ask If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message flashes for five your dealer. if equipped. Clean your oil is changed. Instead.How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL What to Do with Used Oil Message Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be The GM Oil Life SystemTMcalculates when to change unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Anytime Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. that lets you know when the engine air cleanedfilter is dirty and needs to be serviced. 5-22 . problem properly disposing of your used oil. If a hand cleaner. warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. a service station or a local recycling center seconds. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off. If you To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message do the change your own oil. If you have a times within five seconds. See the manufacturer’s a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on. for help. Engine Air CleanedFilter The air cleaner/filter assembly has an indicator. or into streams or bodies of water. into sewers. in the trash. recycle it by 2.

After changing the air filter. replace the engine air cleaner/filter. press the top button on the The air cleanedfilter assembly is located on the front indicator to reset it. When both service window A and service window B turn orange. corner of the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-74 for more information on location.See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page6-IO to determine when to check the indicator. The service window A with the percentage scale shows the amount of engine air cleanedfilter life used. 5-23 .

The air cleaner not only cleans theair. a backfire can 2. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the engine air cleaner/filter. 1. easily get into your engine. 4. 5. and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off. Install the new engine air cleaner/filter. 3.If it isn’t there and the engine backfires. Remove the air cleanedfilter from the housing. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off. you couldbe burned. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing and lift up the cover. Care cause a damaging enginefire. And. which willdamage it. 5-24 . To replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the following: Don’t drive with it off. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws. Clean the filter sealing surface and the housing. it stops flame if the engine backfires. dirt can should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible. See Part B: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned.

transmission fluid level if you have been driving: If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over 8.000 miles At high speed for quite a while. Too much can mean that some In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature of the fluid could come out and fall onhot engine regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. change the fluid and filter every 100.especially in hot weather. or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. 0 While pulling a trailer. 5-25 . If you do it yourself. (166 000 km). See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4. part or exhaust system parts. you may choose to have this done at the dealership service A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid department. the fluid should be at normal operating temperature. not use your vehicle under any ofthese conditions. starting a fire. overheat.600 or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage conditions: your transmission. In heavy traffic .000 miles here. Uses such as found in taxi. level is when the engine oil is changed. which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).600 and you do When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). (83 000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to 0 In hilly or mountainous terrain. check your transmission fluid. To get the right reading. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you When doing frequent trailer towing.Automatic Transmission Fluid How to Check When to Check and Change Because this operation can be a little difficult. be sure to follow all the instructions Change both the fluid and filter every 50. police or delivery Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the service.

follow these steps: (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (IOOC). Push it back in all the way. without shutting off the engine. With your foot on the brake pedal. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. graphic is located at the rear of the engine A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has compartment. on the been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off. place the shift lever in PARK (P). but this is used only as a reference. Should the fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for level be low during this cold check. passenger’s side. With the parking brake applied. drive the vehicle The red transmission in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage dipstick handle with the moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles Then. 1. fluid hot before adding fluid. Then. position the shift lever in PARK (P). Checking the Fluid Level 2. wait three seconds and Prepare your vehicle as follows: then pull it back out again. If it’s colder than 50°F (IOOC). Park your vehicle on a level place. pausing for about three seconds in each range. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F (IOOC) or more. Keep the engine running. you may have to idle the engine longer. move the shift lever through each gear range. 5-26 . Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level. If it’s colder than 50°F (IOOC). you must check the more information on location.

If the fluid level is in the acceptable range. down to lock the dipstick in place. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16. 4. Engine Coolant Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with it is hot. for a cold check or in made especially for your automatic transmission. If you have a problem with engine overheating. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) If DEX-COOL@engine coolant. 3. push the How to Add Fluid dipstick back in all the way. Check both sides of the dipstick. 5-27 . the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@ check. Don’t overfill. DEXRON@111. This coolant is designed the fluid level is low. then flip the handle described under How to Check. 111 is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. push the After adding fluid. generally less than one DEX-COOL@ extendedlife coolant. The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. When the correct fluid level is obtained. add only enough of the proper fluid to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150. recheck the fluid level as dipstick back in all the way. (240 000 km). see Engine Overheating on page 5-30. The fluid level must be in the COLD area. pint (0. whichever occurs first.000 miles to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. because fluid with that label is below the cross-hatched area.5 L). if you add only It doesn’t take much fluid. and read the lower Nofice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled level. then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.

it is important that but you wouldn’t getthe overheat warning. you use onlyDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant. radiator. radiator corrosion may result.at 30. heater core or drinkable water and DEX-COOL@coolant. 5-28 . you don’t you don’t need to add anything else. With plainwater or the should. Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Notice: If you use an improper . wrong mixture. the engine coolant will require change sooner -. Use a mixture of one-half clean. . Plain water. Damage caused by the use of coolant other your engine could overheat and be badlydamaged. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean. premature engine. If you use this coolant mixture. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack theengine. warranty. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the Let the warning lights and gages work as they proper coolant mixture. These can be harmful. coolant mixture. whichever occurs first.000 miles (50. one-half DEX-COOL@coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. Notice: If you use the proper coolant. than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. can boil Help keep the proper engine temperature. your engine could get too hot Notice: When adding coolant. Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). before the proper coolant mixture will. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year. Your engine could catch fire and you or others If coolant other than DEX-COOL@is added to could be burned.A 50/50 mixture of clean. In addition. have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. drinkable water and have your dealer check your cooling system.000 km) or 24 months. drinkable water and DEX-COOL@coolant will: Give freezing protection down to -34°F ( -37°C). or Protect against rust and corrosion. heater core and What to Use other parts. some other liquid such as alcohol. the system.

Youcanbe burnec youspill coa In hot engine parts. 5-29 . page 5-74 for more information on location. make sure it is engine and radiator are hot.when the When replacing the pressure cap. Turning the surge tank pressure cap when and it will burn if the engine parts arehot the engine and radiatorare hot can allow enough. Coolant contains ethylene glycol.Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface. steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. located in the engine If the LOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes on and compartment on the stays on. hand-tight. When your engine is cold. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.even a little . but only when the engine is cool. Never turn the surge tank pressure cap . the coolant level should be at the FULL The coolant surge tank is COLD mark. Adding Coolant If you need more coolant. it means you’re low on engine coolant. See Engine See “Low Coolant Level” under DIC Warnings and Compantment Overview on Messages on page 3-62. add the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture at the surge tank. passenger’s side of the vehicle.

In addition.Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your See Engine Comparfment Overview on page5-14 for vehicle’s instrument panel. Repairthe cause of coolant loss. you will notice a loss in power and engine Notice: Your pressure cap is a pressure-type cap performance. to avoid engine damage. Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode (V8 Engines Only) If an overheated engine condition exists and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed. extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the See “Capacities and Specifications” for more overheat protection mode should be avoided. an The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully overheat protection mode which alternates firing installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-44. This operating mode allows your vehicle to and must be tightly installed to prevent coolantloss be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Notice: After driving in the overheated engine protection operatingmode. allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. The engine oil will be severely degraded. ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER message in the DIC on the instrument panel. change the oil and reset the oi life system. Driving and possible engine damage from overheating.See “Engine Oil” in the Index. you will find a LOW COOLANT LEVEL. See Driver information Center (DIC) on page 3-52. 5-30 . information. In this mode.

If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant. Wait until there is no sign of s ~ e a m o r coolant before you open the hood. The costly repairs would notbe I covered by your warranty. the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. your vehicle can be badly damaged. even if you just open the hood. Stop your engine if it overheats. Just turn it off and get CAUTION: (Continued) 5-31 . coming from it. See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency.If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine eryone away fro thevenlcle cools down.Stay information on driving to a safe placein an away from the engineif you see or hear steam emergency. If you keep driving when your engineis overheated. and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. Notice.See “Overheated Steam from an overheated engine can burn Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index for you badly.

pull off the road. In heavy traffic. 5-32 . you can drive. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary. along with a low coolant message. Sometimes the engine can accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as get a little too hot when you: fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you’re parked. cools down. If you get an engine overheat warning with no low coolant message. try this for a minute or so: 1. Shift to park or neutral and let the engine idle. see Overheated Engine Protection Idle for long periods in traffic. Operating Mode listed previously in this section. drive slower for about 10 minutes. stop.If No Steam Is Coming From If you no longer have the overheat warning. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam. vehicle right away. let the engine idle in neutral while stopped. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get sewice help right away. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-59. normally. the problem If there’s still no sign of steam. pull over. If it is safe to do so. turn off Climb a long hill on a hot day. See Low Coolant If the warning continues. you can drive An overheat warning. Your Engine If the warning doesn’t come back on. and park your under DlC Warnings and Messages on page 3-62. the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it Stop after high-speed driving. but see or hear no steam. can indicate a serious problem. Just to be safe. you can push down the may not be too serious. Tow a trailer. 2. Also. If you still have the warning.

here’s what you’ll see: All Other Engines A. don’t do anything else until it cools down. EngineFan If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling. 5-33 . The vehicle should be parked on a level surface. Coolant Surge Tank B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap 8100 V8 Engines C.Cooling System When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood.

ioses. heater hoses. The coolant level should If there seems to be no leak. and you could be burned. it could lose all coolant. If you than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle do. be at or above the FULL The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle COLD mark. Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency.at 30. Don’t run the engine if thereis a leak. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. If it doesn’t. you can be burned. Notice: When adding coolant. and --. speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal you may have a leak at the down. If it isn’t. water Notice: Engine damage from running your engine pump or somewhere else without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. 5-34 . warranty. radiator hoses. your vehicle needs service. it is important that you use onlyDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant. in the cooling system. If coolant other thanDEX-COOL@is added to the system. radiator. can be very hot. start the engine again. premature engine. In addition. whichever occurs first.000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months.ier engine Damage caused by the use of coolant other parts. . Heater and radiato. See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating P. Turn off pressure cap or in the the engine. If you run the engine. the engine coolant will require change sooner. Don’t touch them. heater core or radiator corrosion may result. That could cause an engine fire.

and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap-. add coolant as follows: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. surge tank. is hot. If no coolant is visible in the surge tank. drinkable water and DEX-COOL@ coolant atthe coolant the pressure cap. check to see if COOK surge tank pressure cap. including the CAUTION: (Continued) 5-35 . They are under pressure. If coolant is visible for the cooling system and coolant surge tank but the coolant level isn’t at or above the FULL pressure cap tocool if you ever have to turn COLD mark. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for more information. including I the coolant surge tank pressure cap. Wait coolant is visible in the surge tank. is cool before you do it. add a 50/50 mixture of clean. Never turn the cap when the cooling system.even a little they -- can come out at high speed.How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet. but be sure the cooling system.

no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise (left) about one full turn. Don’t spill coolant on a hotengine. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean. water can freeze and crack upper radiator hose. heater core and other parts. radiator. 5-36 . L remove the coolant Your engine could catch fire and you or others surge tank pressure could be burned. Coolant contains ethylene glycol some other liquid such as alcohol. 3. wait for that to stop. and remove it. your engine could get too hot level surface. Adding only plain water to your cooling You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot system can be dangerous. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. system. vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. if you hear a hiss. Park the vehicle on a wrong mixture. can boil and it will burn if the engine partsare hot before the proper coolant mixture will. Plain water. Your enough. You can but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and Notice: In cold weather. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture. or engine parts. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly. 2. is the engine. cap when the cooling drinkable water and DEX COOL@coolant. With plain water or the 1.

4. to the FULL COLD mark. the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. Watch out for the engine cooling fan. add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off. If the level is lower. 5-37 . By this time. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper 5. start mixture. the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.

Then replace the You may also hear this fan noise when you start the pressure cap. 5-38 . the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. When the clutch is engaged. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly. the fan 8100 Engines speed increases as the clutch more fully engages. The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages. In most everyday driving conditions. 6. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. hand-tight and fully seated. the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. Be sure engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially the pressure cap is disengages. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Power Steering Fluid Engine Fan Noise Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. Under heavy vehicle loading. trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures.

If you will you hear an unusual noise. let the engine compartment cool down. use a fluid that has and repaired. Windshield Washer Fluid When to Check Power Steering Fluid What to Use It is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid When you need windshield washer fluid. 5-39 . See Engine on page 5-14 for reservoir location. Compartment Overview on page 5-74 for reservoir How to Check Power Steering Fluid location. be sure to read unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or the manufacturer’s instructions before use. Turn the key off. Have the system inspected temperature may fall below freezing. then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. A fluid loss in this system be operating your vehicle in an area where the could indicate a problem. See Engine Comparfment Overview sufficient protection against freezing.

only when full when it’s very cold. much fluid when you get new brake linings. which could damage the tank ifit is completely full. you the manufacturer’s instructions for adding should have your brake system fixed. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for the location of the reservoir.Adding Washer Fluid 7Open the cap with the Brake Fluid washer symbol on it. 5-40 . follow that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. This allows for work is done on the brake hydraulic system. Add washer fluid until the Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3 tank is full. water doesn’t when your linings are worn. expansion if freezing occurs. since a leak water. Water can cause the solution to freeze and So. If you add fluid of the washer system. Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. or won’t work at all. it isn’t a good idea to “top off your brake fluid.Also. Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze)in your windshield washer. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during Notice: normal brake lining wear. damage your washer fluid tank and other parts Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. The other reason is When using concentrated washer fluid. then you’ll have too clean as well as washer fluid. the fluid level goes back up. It can damage your washer system and paint. You should Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters add (or remove) brake fluid. If it is. When new linings are put in. brake fluid. as necessary.

See "Checking Brake Fluid" in this section. You or others could be burned. and your vehicle couldbe damaged.. .f If you have too much brake fluid. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough.. See Parf C: Periodic Maintenance inspections on page 6-14. Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap... If it isn't have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak.za I _ " the engine. . After work is done on the brake hydraulic system. Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid. The fluid level should be above MIN.L't~"x.it can spill on . Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. +.% i . I . . 5-4 1 .:. make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark..

Use new brake fluid from a sealed container system parts. Always use the proper brake fluid.If you do. See “Appearance Care” in the Index. brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. use only DOT-3 brake fluid. your brakes may not workwell. With the wrong kind of fluidin your brake system.What to Add Notice: Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake When you do need brake fluid. in your on page 6. Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.16. If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces. suchas engine oil. 5-42 . around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants mineral-based oil. wash it off immediately. This could cause a crash. or they may not even work at all. just a few drops of only. For example. the paint finish can bedamaged.

your disc brakes Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake adjust for wear. inspect may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in is moving (except when you are pushing on the the proper sequence to GM torque specifications. applied. pads could result in costly brake repair. See Brake System lnspection on page 6. This does not mean something is wrong with Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make your brakes.Brake Wear Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. brake pedal firmly). 5-43 .15. have your vehicle pedal travel. or if there is a rapid increase in wear warning sound. The sound prevent brake pulsation. This could be a sign of brake trouble. Brake Pedal Travel The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won’t work well. That could See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to lead to an accident. When you hear the brake normal height. a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help are worn and new pads are needed. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop. serviced. When tires are rotated.

for example. Warning: Battery posts. Your the battery. Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco@ battery. brake parts.for the worse. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for battery location. Battery Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. negative (-) cable from the vehicle is to have really good braking. when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in . terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. 5-44 . You can be badly hurt if you and rear brakes can change . remove the black.Replacing Brake System Parts Vehicle Storage The braking system on a vehicle is complex. replacement brake parts. We recommend an ACDelco@ battery.. your brakes may no longer work properly.. Whenit’s time for a new battery. When you replace parts of your braking system . See “Jump Starting” next for braking performance you’ve come to expect can change tips on working around a battery without in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong getting hurt. get Also. see Theft-Deterrent one that has the replacement number shown on the Feature on page 3-124. The aren’t careful.be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. This will help keep your battery from vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM running down. ies have acid that can d r n you and gas wrong for your vehicle. Its many If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or parts have to be of top quality and work well together if more. If you don’t. for your audio system. original battery’s label. Wash hands after handling. the balance between your front that can explode. For example. if someone puts in brake linings that are Batl.

And it could save your radio! 1. but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. Put the automatic They contain acid that can burn you. It must have a 12-volt 4. transmission in PARK (P) before setting the parking They contain gas that can explode or brake. won’t work. This Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. negative (-) terminal locations of the other vehicle. the radio and all the lamps that aren’t needed. 5-45 . Batteries can hurt you.Jump Starting Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a negative ground. 3. and it could damage your vehicle. both vehicles can be If your battery (or batteries) has run down. can reach. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by or all of these things can hurt you. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and battery with a negative ground system. some damaged. Be sure to followthe steps below to do it safely. be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in They contain enough electricity to NEUTRAL. Notice: If you leave your radio on. it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables start your vehicle. Check the other vehicle. it could be badly If you don’t follow these steps exactly. If they are. Unplug Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered lighter or in the accessory power outlets. set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. you may damaged. Turn off by your warranty. your warranty. want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to 2. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle.They can be dangerous To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling. and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.

If you don’t. and some have been blinded. You engine drive bracket on all V8 and diesel don’t need to addwater to the ACDelco@ engines. On V8 engines it is marked ”GND. flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. explosive gas could be present. People have been hurt doing bracket. add water See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5.1 L engine.14 for more information on location. and on the thermostat housing on the battery installed in your new vehicle. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. be sure the right amount of fluid is there. Don’t get it on you. The remote negative (-) terminal is located on the Be sure the battery has enoughwater. flashlight if you need more light. l g amat near abatterycan causc attery red plastic cover near the engine accessory drive gas to explode. To uncover the remote positive (+) this. But aif 8. to take careof that first. If it is low.” battery has filler caps. You should always use these remote terminals instead of the terminals on the battery. open the red plastic cover. Use a terminal. The remote positive (+) terminal is located behind a . Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting terminal and a remote negative (-) jump starting terminal. 5-46 . If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin.

6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. Before you connect the cables. And don’t connectthe negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks. touch metal. Use you badly. If they do. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the Fans or otl ’ moving engine parts can injure dead battery. maybe other parts too. battery. 5. The vehicles could be damaged too. Don’t let the other end vehicle has one. Use a remote Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll positive (+) terminal get a short that would damage the battery and if the vehicle has one. here are some basic things you should know. terminal if the vehicle has one. 5-47 . Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or a remote positive (+) terminal if the 7 . Negative(-) will go to a heavy. you could get a shock. Keep your hands away from moving a remote positive (+) parts once the engine is running. Connect it to the positive (+) unpainted metal engine part or a remote terminal of the good negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.

unpainted metal part. 8. 5-48 . Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. it probably needs service. Use negative (-) terminal of a remote negative (-) the dead battery or to a terminal if the remote negative (-) vehicle has one. take care that the cables don’t touch each otheror any other metal. The other end of the negative (-) cable the engine for a while. To prevent electrical shorting. doesn’t go to the dead battery. it won’t start after a few tries. Nofice: Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly. or to the remote negative (-) 12. terminal if the vehicle has one. 9. If terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next 11. Now connect the black 10. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run step. It goes to a heavy. Connect the other end negative (-) cable to of the negative(-) the good battery’s cable to the negative (-) cable.

Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to its original position. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the vehicle that had the bad battery. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from vehicle with the good battery. 2. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative (-) Terminals C. Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B. To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following: 1. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. Heavy. 5. Jumper Cable Removal A. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal 5-49 . 4.

However. vehicles. kind of lubricant to use. Transfer Case Use care not to overtighten the plug. you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. there are two additional systems that If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole.All-Wheel Drive To get an accurate reading. How to Check Lubricant Automatic Transfer Case (A) Fill Plug (B) Drain Plug 5-50 . need lubrication. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16. the vehicle should be on a Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these level surface. See Part C: Periodic Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what Maintenance Inspections on page 6-14. When to Check Lubricant What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant.

Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level. the vehicle should be on a level surface. 1500 Series shown. How to Check Lubricant What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. 5-51 . the filler plug hole. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16. 2500 similar To get an accurate reading. The proper level for the 2500 Series When to Check Lubricant is from 0 to 1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how of the filler plug hole.Rear Axle The proper level for the 1500 Series is from 5/8 inch to 1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole. See Part A: Scheduled (4 Wheel Steer) is from 0 to 1/4 inch (0 to 6 mm) below Maintenance Services on page 6-4. The proper level for the 1500 and 2500 series vehicles with QUADRASTEERTM often to check the lubricant.

See Part C: Periodic Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what Maintenance Inspections on page 6-14. Transfer Case Use care not to overtighten the plug. kind of lubricant to use. you’ll need to add some lubricant. there are two additional systems that If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole.Four-wheel Drive To get an accurate reading. vehicles. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. How to Check Lubricant ~~ Automatic Transfer Case 5-52 . However. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page6-16. need lubrication. the vehicle should be on a Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these level surface. When to Check Lubricant What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant.

See Part A: Scheduled When the differential is cold. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Pad D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16. 5-53 . How to Check Lubricant add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. add enough lubricant to Maintenance Services on page 6-4.Front Axle To get an accurate reading. raise the level to 0 to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) below the filler plug hole. often to check the lubricant. When the differential is at operating temperature (warm). Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how you may need to add some lubricant. When to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole. the vehicle should be on a level surface.

Bulb Replacement Headlamps For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section. Halogen Bulbs nalogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. Your vehicle is equipped with two pins. turn the outer pin outward and pull it straight up. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. To remove the inner pin. turn it in and pull it straight up. 1. 5-54 . See Replacement Bulbs on page5-59 for the proper types of bulbs to use. remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp assembly. To remove the pins. contact your dealer. You or others could be injured.

2. Put the new bulb into the assembly and turn it 1. towards the outside of the vehicle. DaytimeRunningLamp 5. Pull the turn signal housing out from the vehicle. SidemarkerLamp 3. Unplug the electrical connector. 3. Install and tighten the two pins. signal housing. Use care not to touch previously. 7. High-BeamHeadlamp 2. Front Turn Signal. Front Turn Signal Lamp from the headlamp assembly. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it C. Remove the headlamp assembly as mentioned clockwise until it is tight. Sidemarker and Daytime Running Lamps A. Plug in the electrical connector. B. Pull the headlamp assembly out. Press the retainer clip. 5-55 . Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle. A. located behind the turn 6. D. Low-BeamHeadlamp B. the bulb with your fingers or hands. Retainer Clip 4.

housing. to touch the bulb with your fingers or hands. Using a flat tool. 5-56 . 6. turn the bulb socket 4. Remove the two placing the hook and posts on the inner side into screws and lift off the alignment holes first and then the outer side into the lens.4. Pull the housing out to expose the wiring harness and connector. Use care not 7. Side Identification Marker Lamps 1. 3. the retainer bracket. push into the slot to release the lamp housing. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing and turn it clockwise until it locks. 7. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket. 5. Reinstall the lamp housing. To expose the service slot. Put the turn signal housing back onto the vehicle 1. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle. 5. and pull back the edge. 6. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket. 9. Roof Marker Lamps 8. Unplug the lamp assembly harness from the counterclockwise and remove it from the turn signal housing. Put in a new lamp and snap it into the housing. locate the lamp gasket near the rear wheel. 2. Press the locking release lever. Push until you hear a click. Unplug the lamp.

Remove the six screws on the center roof marker lamps. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise to remove it from the socket. 5-57 . Put a new bulb into the socket and turn clockwise until it locks in place. 3. 4. I 2.

Back-upLamp C. Use a tool to remove the two screws from the lamp assembly. Taillamps A. Stoplamp I 5. 5-58 . Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws. 1. Turn Signal Lamp 6.

6. Turn Lamp Taillamp and I 3157 I 1 Back-up Lamp 13157 I For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer. Press the release tab and turn the bulb socket counterclockwiseto remove it from the taillamp housing. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly 5-59 . Press a new bulb into the socket. Pull the old bulb straight out from the High-Beam Headlamps 9005 socket. Remove the lamp assembly. -Exterior Lamp Bulb Number 9006 Low-Beam Headl 4.2. 5. Replacement Bulbs 3. insert the socket into the taillamp housing and turn the socket clockwise into the taillamp housing until it clicks. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL 4157K Front Roof Marker Lamp 194 Front Parking and Turn Lamp 3457A Lamp I Rear Marker Stop I Rear13157 Lamp.

2. For proper type and length. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver’s side of the vehicle. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is facing away from the windshield. Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways.109.Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear and cracking. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2. 3. See At Least Twice a Year on page 6-10 for more information. 5-60 . see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 5. To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the following: 1.

You could have an air-out and a your tread is badly worn. If you ever have questions about your tire warrantyand where to obtain service. or if your tires serious accident. old tires can cause accidents. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. punctured or broken by a sudden are dangerous. Overinflated tires are more likely to be Poorly maintained and imp1 berly used tires cut. If friction. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. overheating as a result of too much Worn. See “Loading Your have been damaged. Vehicle” in the Index.Ti res Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. replace them. impact . Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold. CAUTION: (Continued) 5-61 .such as when you hit a pothole. as overloaded tires. Overloading your tires can cause Keep tires at the recommended pressure. atedtirespose I samedanger see your warranty booklet for details.

Radial tires may look don’t have enough air (underinflation). 0 Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards 5-62 . and then try to rotate or turn the tire. for your tires when they’re cold. It’s not. which is on the rear edge of Check your tires once a month or more. Unusual wear Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push. check the tire pressure of the spare tire.500 miles (12 500 km). “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven How to Check no more than 1 mile (1. Also Bad fueleconomy check for damaged tires or wheels. Bad handling Any time you notice unusual wear. Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation pressure. the following: Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. See When It Is Time If your tires have too much air (overinflation). If your tires simply by looking at them. Too muchflexing They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.Tire Pressure When to Check The Certificationrrire label. the driver’s door. Bad handling use the ratchevwheel wrench to tighten the cable. 0 Too muchheat Tire overloading Tire Inspection and Rotation Bad wear Tires should be rotated every 7. shows the correct inflation pressures Also. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated or overinflation is all right. you for New Tires on page 5-64 and Wheel Replacement can get the following: on page 5-67 for more information.Inflation -. If it moves. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70. you can get properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.6 km). pull. rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.

remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.The wheel could come off and cause an accident. you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this. can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The first rotation is the most important. When you change a wheel. if you need to. See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index. When rotating your tires.” in Section 6.The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the CertificationRire label. but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later. Rust or dirt on awheel. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-106. or on theb-. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. to get all the rust or dirt off.Zs to which it is fastened. 5-63 . After the tires have been rotated. In an emergency. always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. for scheduled rotation intervals. See “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services.

When It Is Time for New Tires Buying New Tires One way to tell when it’s To find out what kind and size of tires you need. which will a Tire Performance Criteria Specifications (TPC appear when your tires Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. (1. around the tire. 5-64 . You can see the indicators at three or more places bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. handling. The tire has a puncture. bulge or split. load range. The tire has a bump. make sure they are the same size. The tread or sidewall is cracked. normal service on your vehicle. get ones with that same TPC Spec number. If your tires have an all-season tread design. Some That way your vehicle will continue to have tires commercial truck tires may that are designed to give proper endurance. traction. check the treadwear The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had indicators.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. speed rating and construction type (bias. cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. When you get have only 1/16 inch new tires. ride and other things during indicators. You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. not have treadwear speed rating. You need a new tire if any of the following statements If you ever replace your tires with those not having a are true: TPC Spec number. the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow). look at time for new tires is to the Certification/Tire label.

) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. Use only could have a crash. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread. it will not affect vehicle handling or developed by the United States National Highway cause damage to your vehicle. traction and temperature performance. the many miles of driving. sizes may also cause damageto your vehicle. and you could fail suddenly. causing a crash. Traffic Safety Administration. or to some limited-production tires. which grades tires by treadwear. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. 5-65 . your tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum vehicle included a spare tire and wheel section width. Using tires of different radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. space-saver or temporary use spare tires. Because this spare tire was developed for useon your The following information relates to the system vehicle. the while driving. Be sure to use thesame size and type tires on all wheels. For example: assembly with the same overall diameter as Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A your vehicle’s road tires and wheels.A tire and/or wheel vehicle may not handle properly. winter-type snow tires. If you mix tires of different sizes wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after or types (radial and bias-belted tires). If your vehicle has 17 inch road tires (those originally installed on your vehicle) Uniform Tire Quality Grading 16 inch spare tire it is all right to drive with the Quality grades can be found where applicable on the that came with your vehicle. tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm). When new.Mixing tires could cause you to lose control If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle.

they must also conform to federal safety The temperature grades are A (the highest). can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.A. are AA. or Traction .While the tires available on General Motors passenger Temperature . 5-66 . B. B. and C. The grade C corresponds to a conditions on a specified government test course. underinflation.AA. of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor Treadwear laboratory test wheel. C cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades. and does not include acceleration. A. B. A tire marked C may have poor The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancea traction performance. hydroplaning. either separately or in combination. The relative performance of tires performance on the laboratory test wheel than the depends upon the actual conditions of their use. and excessive temperature can lead to the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled sudden tire failure. Grades B and A represent higher levels of a tire graded 100. a tire graded 150 would wear one and meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard a half (15 ) times as well on the government course as No. and C. traction tests. C excessive loading. established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. level of performance which all passenger car tires must For example. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on reduce tire life. minimum required by law. Excessive speed. and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits. A. 109. or peak traction characteristics. cornering. B. from highest to lowest. Warning: The traction grade carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking and best overall performance. requirements and additional General Motors Tire representing the tire’s resistance to the generation Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. The traction grades. however. service practices and Warning: The temperature grade for thistire is differences in road characteristics and climate. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road. the injured. Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain capacity. Always use the correct wheel. which can sometimes be repaired).wheel may need to be rebalanced. if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other. or wheel nuts. wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air. you will be sure to have the right wheel. replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle. bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. the alignment may need to be reset. Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life. wheel wheel. your wheels U l g thew 1g replacementwheels. wheel bolts information. bumper height. replace it (except some aluminum wheels. brake cooling. make your tires lose Wheel Replacement air and make you lose control.Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. odometer calibration. width. headlamp aim. cracked or badly rusted a collision in which you or others could be or corroded. speedometer or Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for more If you need to replace any of your wheels. 5-67 . See your dealer if any of these conditions exist. If wheel nuts keep coming loose. the same way as the one it replaces. However. This way. diameter. offset and be mounted clearance to the body and chassis.You could have Replace any wheel that is bent.

is IT your vehicle has r265/75R16. They can damage your vehicle suddenly and cause a crash. use a new GM original chains used on a vehicle without the proper equipment wheel. If you do find traction devices that will fit. don’t use or how far it’s been driven. Tire replace a wheel. LT265/75R16. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.. and don’t spin your wheels.Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains Putl. dangerous. readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle. It could fail tire chains. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions.The area damaged bythe tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. drive slowly. suspension or other vehicle parts. 5-68 .. or P265/7OR17 size tires. install them on the rear tires.g a used wheel on your vehic.. To help avoid damage to your vehicle. You can’t know how it’s been used P265ROR16. If you have to because there’s not enoughclearance. amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes.

chains contacting your vehicle. the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. the flat tire will create a drag that securely fastened. slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout”. Drive slowly and follow the chain pulls the vehicle toward that side. a few tips about what to expect and what to do: Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends If a front tire fails. Use chains that are the proper especially if you maintain your tires properly. only when you must. If the contact continues. particularly on a curve. and then gently brake to them. Install them on the rear tires goes out of a tire. If air size for your tires.well off the road if possible. 5-69 . stop and retighten Steer to maintain lane position. remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. P265DQR16.Notice: If you have a tire size other than If a Tire Goes Flat P265D5R16. If you can hear the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. but you can still steer.or P265DQR17use tire chains only where legal and It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with A rear blowout. In any rear blowout. If a tire goes flat. It may be very bumpy and noisy. skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. LT265D5R16. it stops. it’s much more likely to leak out only. here are Don’t use chains on the front tires. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. acts much like a chains on will damage your vehicle. Take your foot off the manufacturer’s instructions. Gently brake to a stop . slow down until a stop well out of the traffic lane.

Find a level place to change your tire. in PARK (P). The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and 2. 5-70 . 3. Turn on your hazard warning flashers. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Turn off the engine.. That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle. You and they could be badly injured. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Put the wheel blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. Set the parking brake firmly. Cha -ing a -. or shift a manual transmission to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R). Put an automatic transmission shift lever change a tire.2 can cause an injury. at the opposite end.Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat.

RemovableTray Tools and Gloves The equipment you'll need is under the storage tray in the left trim panel for SuburbanNukon XL models. 5-71 . Bracket and Wing Nut C.Removing the Spare Tire and Tools / A B C TahoeNukon Models (Rear Access Panel) SuburbanNukon XL Models A.Mounting Bracket H. Retaining Hook Jack Tools E. Wheel Block Wing Nut D. Retaining Bracket and B. Tool Kit with Jack E.Wheel Blocks G. Jack B. Wing Nut Wing Nut C. Tire Blocks A. Bottle Jack F. Tool Kit with D.

For TahoeNukon models. turn the wing nut counterclockwise. Pointed Hole Down K. Spare Tire Extension Tool 5-72 . Jack Handle I. Skip wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire. 3. A. Hoist Lock (If Extensions Equipped) D. 1 .HoistCable C. turn the knob on the bottle jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head. 2. Hoist End of F. The wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer can be removed by turning the wing nut counterclockwise. Hoist Assembly G. Hoist Shaft Access E. Wheel Wrench H. the first step and follow the last three. the equipment is located You’ll use the jack handle extensions and the wheel behind the left trim panel in the rear of the vehicle. TireRetainer B. There is a wing nut used to retain the tool kit. Remove the tray to access the tools. Valve Stem. To release the bottle jack from its holder. Hoist Shaft J. 4. To remove it.

4.. designed to stop the spare tire from falling off your 2. See end (open end) of the extension through the hole in “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” for instructions the rear bumper.-dure read all the . follow the instructions listed below. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground.. It’s ignition key to remove the lock. If the spare tire does not lower to the ground. . For the secondary latch to work. Assemble the wheel wrench and the two jack vehicle. Read and you. Insert the hoist be installed with the valve stem pointing down.. Be sure the hoist end of the on storing the spare or flat tire correctly... When the tire has been lowered. ..Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire: Secondary Latch System 1. wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out instructions. Failure to read and follow the from under the vehicle. open the Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.this c. the spare must handle extensions as shown. 5-73 . to assist in reaching the spare tire. Continue to turn the Before be. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.. the I secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower. See ‘Secondary Latch System” next.. 5. tilt the retainer at the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening. If the vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock. 3. The wheel wrench has a instructions could damage the hoist assembly hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards and you and others could get hurt. extension connects into the hoist shaft (the ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire).

wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel 3. 1. 5. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends. with the backs facing each other. continue with step 4 of “Removing Your Spare Tire and Tools” earlier in this section. and wheel the cable. 6. If it is not visible proceed to step 6. 7. rear bumper. Hook the bottom edge of the jack on the wheel If it is visible. extension. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is visible. Repeat this procedure at least two times. clicks or feel it skip twice. separating them so that the jack is the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two balanced securely. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench blocks) under the vehicle towards the front of the counterclockwise three or four turns. 5-74 .To release the spare tire from the secondary latch do 4. if the the following: spare tire lowers to the ground. Attach the jack handle. first try to tighten the cable by turning blocks. You cannot overtighten 8. 2. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately six inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.

The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper balancing on the jack. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it 9. Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare with the other hand. 5-75 . extension and wheel wrench into the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of the way. If the spare is hanging from the cable. under the vehicle. You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been replaced. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Pull the tire out from lifts the end fitting. 13. clockwise to raise the cable back up. Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove the jack. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it through the wheel opening. 10. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle. insert the hoist handle. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops 14. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable. turn the moving upward and is held firmly in place.

Attach the jack handle to the jack. 5-76 . you’ll need to use both jack handle extensions. If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle.The tools you’ll be using include the bottle jack (A). the jack handle (C). the jack handle (as needed). extensions (D). and the wheel wrench (E). the Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions wheel blocks (B).

If the wheel has a smooth center piece. If you have a center cap with wheel nut caps. head to the lifting point. Remove the center cap. If your vehicle has wheel nut caps. place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack lift gently pry out. loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. the wheel nut caps are designed to remain with the center cap. 5-77 .

2.Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1. Don’t remove the wheel nuts yet. Position the jack under the vehicle. 5-78 . use the axle between the spring and shock. Front Rear Position Position Nofice: If your vehicle is equipped with QUADRASTEERTM avoid contact with tie rods and tie rod boots when jacking the vehicle. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle. On all 1500 series vehicles. lower the snow plow fully before raising the vehicle. use the jacking pad provided on the rear axle. If you have added a snow plow to the front of your vehicle. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. On 2500 series vehicles. position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame sections overlap.

To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage.Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked up is dangerous. 5-79 . be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. Front Position Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack you could be badly injured or killed.

Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit back underneath the rear of the vehicle. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. 5-80 . Rear Position Rear Position 1500 Series 2500 Series 5. 4. mounting surfaces 3. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts. rear axle is resting securely between the grooves that are on the jack head. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the and spare wheel.

put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the Rust or dirt on thewheel. 6. can make the wheel nuts wheel. but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later. Tighten each become loose after a time. If I you do. Your wheel fall off. you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this. remove any rust or dirt from held against the hub. or on the parts to nuts toward the which it is fastened. the nuts might come loose. causing could serious a accident. to get all the rust or dirtoff. In an emergency. The wheelcould wheel nut by hand come off and cause an accident. the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. I I 5-81 . After mounting the spare. When you using the wheel wrench until the wheel is change a wheel. if you needto. Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.

.

See “Capacities and Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut torque specification. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened witha torque wrench to the 8.. Incorrect wheel nuts or improC-:ly . 5-83 . be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as proper torque specification.. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut torque specification. If you have to replacethem. To avoid expensive brake repairs.htened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.See ”Capacities shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise. evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.

storing it that way for an extended 5. 5-84 . 3.Storing a Flat Tire and Tools Store the flat tire where the spare tire was stored. When the tire is almost in the stored position. To avoid the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise this. 4. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed downward. adjust the tire so Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should that the valve stem is toward the rear of the vehicle. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel Storing a jack. 2. as soon as possible. Store Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear all these in the proper place. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together. Raise the tire fully against the underside of period of time could damage the wheel. However. In a sudden stop or collision. Make sure the retainer is fully seated passenger compartment of the vehicle could across the underside of the wheel. loose equipment could strike someone. cause injury. a tire. Raise the tire part way upward. always stow the wheel properly withthe valve until you hear two clicks or feel it ship twice. or other equipmentin the opening. To store the tire: 1. bumper and into the hoist shaft. stem pointing down and have the wheel repaired The cable cannot be overtightened. always be stored under the vehicle with the hoist.

Extensions G. Valve Stem. Flat or Spare Tire Put back the jack.JackHandle F. Hoist Shaft H. C. Tire Retainer D. Hoist Cable 5-85 . use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. pull. If the tire B. WheelWrench Pointed Down moves. tools and spare tire lock (if equipped). and then try to rotate or turn the tire. A. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Hoist Assembly E. PUSH & PULL 6. Push.

3. Return the tool kit (jack tools and gloves) to the tool bag. For Suburban/Yukon XL models do the following: 1. Then. Position behind the jack storage cover in the rear access panel. Tighten down with the wing nut.To store the tools. Be sure to position the holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket. Tire Blocks holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the d. Assemble wheel chocks and bottle jack together with the wing nut and retaining hook. Use the retaining clip to fasten the tool kit on the For TahoeNukon models do the following: stud in the storage compartment in the rear left trim panel and turn the wing nut clockwise to 1. follow these procedures: 4. 2. Tool Kit with C. and tighten. adjusting clockwise until the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket. in secure. Bracket andWingNut E. 5-86 . with the jack tools and gloves. 3. 4. Return the storage tray. the tool bag and place in the retaining clip above the jack. Jack mounting bracket. Wheel Block Wing Nut the mounting bracket. Put the tool kit. Position under the jack storage tray in the left rear TahoeNukon Models (Rear Access Panel) side panel below the wheelbase and tighten. 5. 2. assemble wheel chocks and bottle jack together with the wing nut and retaining hook. adjusting clockwise until the jack is secured tight in A. Be sure to position the Jack Tools D.

MountingBracket H. Retaining Bracket and C. had a fully inflated spare tire. See Inflation -. Bottle Jack F. you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is correctly inflated. RemovableTray Tools and Gloves 5-87 . a spare tire will be available in case you need it again. Spare Tire Your vehicle. install or store a spare tire. Wing Nut Wing Nut D.Tire Pressure on page 5-62 and “Loading Your Vehicle” for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle. After installing the spare tire on your vehicle. Tool Kit with Jack E. Retaining Hook B. see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70. A spare tire may lose air over time. Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove. so check its inflation pressure regularly. when new. WheelBlocks G. This way. SuburbanNukon XL models A.

Remember. these will damage your vehicle: match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. And always open your doors Bleach or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. ReducingAgents Never use these to clean your vehicle: Gasoline Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Benzene Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and Naphtha loose dirt. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed Alcohol space. are toxic.Appearance Care They can all be hazardous . too. When you use anything from a container to clean LaundrySoap your vehicle. plastic and painted surfaces with a clean. Some Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions.some more than others -and they can all damage your vehicle. Others can burst into flames if you strike a In many uses. Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover 5-88 . leather. damp cloth. Wipe vinyl. cleaning products can be hazardous.

If a stain remains. Stains caused by candy. urine 0 Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. milk. area often. use a sponge to remove any excess cleaner. 3. and blood can be removed as follows: Clean up stains as soon as you can . Follow the directions on the container label. If a stain remains. 2. ice cream. 5-89 . Let dry. chili 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.approved cleaning products from 7. 2. the area with a watedbaking soda solution: 0 If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. the material and don’t rub it roughly. treat stubborn. They will clean normal spots and stains 6. and change to a clean described earlier. then sponge the they set. follow the cleaner instructions Use a clean cloth or sponge. soiled area with cool water. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-94. Wipe cleaned area with a clean. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.before 1. water-dampened very well. egg. surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: loose dirt. A soft brush may be used if stains are 3. of lukewarm water. Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and carpet. Carefully scrape off excess stain. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely. Mask 1. fruit juice.FabricKarpet 5. Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Here are some cleaning tips: Stains caused by such things as catsup. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry. coffee (black). towel or cloth. 0 Carefully scrape off any excess stain. You can get GM . Using Cleaner on Fabric 4. Don’t saturate described earlier. mayonnaise. follow the cleaner instructions 4. your dealer. fruit. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine. 3. clean 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 mi) the entire area immediately or it will set. soft drinks. 2. vomit. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section.

You of the instrument panel. an electric defogger element may be damaged. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish. Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned because they may cause scratches. furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. use a leather cleaner. you don’t get them off quickly. Glass should be cleaned often. varnishes. Then. GM Glass Cleaner or a 0 For stubborn stains. windshield and even make it difficult to see through the 0 Things like tar. let Glass Surfaces the leather dry naturally. since they it can harm the leather. 5-90 .Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid. Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass. See your liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal dealer for this product. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window. solvent-based or abrasive GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-94. cleaners. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the may have to do this more than once. Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces 0 Rub with a clean. Use a clean cloth and vinyVleather cleaner. See 0 Never use oils. Avoid placing immediately. decals on the inside rear window. See your dealer for Interior Plastic Components this product. asphalt and shoe polish will stain if windshield under certain conditions. Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth.Vinyl Top of the Instrument Panel Use warm water and a clean cloth. may have to be scraped off later. Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth Leather or sponge. tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. damp cloth to remove dirt. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish. Do not use heat to dry.

or that contain acid or abrasives. Be sure to rinse the vehicle may severely weaken them. Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. SeePart D: Recommended Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses Fluids and Lubricants on page 6. Clean safety belts only with mild See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on soap and lukewarm water. depth of color. The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. If .Its. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle. seal better. damp weather more frequent application may be required.u do. page 5-94.16. Apply High pressure car washes may cause water to enter silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six your vehicle. Dry the finish Weatherstrips with a soft. or they could stain. and not stick or squeak. 5-9 1 . In a crash.” Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty. clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last avoid surface scratches and water spotting. months. gloss retention and durability. protection. During very cold. they well. Don’t use strong soaps Do not bleach or dye safety . Use only lukewarm or cold water. removing all soap residue completely. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based.. a soft cloth and a car Cleaning the Outside of Your washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Care of Safety Belts Washing Your Vehicle Keep belts clean and dry. You can get might not be able to provide adequate GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. it or chemical detergents. Use a car washing soap. longer.

Windshield. Use special care with aluminum trim. road oil and tar. Then rinse the blade and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a with water. ice melting agents. If necessary. never use auto or chrome polish. rubbed to high polish. If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer. Backglass and Wiper Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive Blades polishing on a basecoaffclearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades foreign matter. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging. droppings. steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. Always use waxes and polishes that are bright metal parts. or if the wiper blade chatters when running. Washing with water is all that is usually hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. etc. possible. period of years. and affect their performance. bird windshield. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary. whenever possible. To avoid damaging protective trim. weather windshield washer solvent. chemicals from industrial chimneys.. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other wax. 5-92 . See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-94. is recommended for all basecoat.Finish Care Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. However. sap or other material may be on the blade or salts. you may use chromepolish on chrome or stainless steel trim. The windshield is clean if beads do on painted surfaces. If your vehicle has a “basecoatklearcoat” paint finish. replace blades that look worn. from your dealer. tree sap. non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoat paint finish. A coating of The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored wax. Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain glass cleaning liquid. You can get GM-approved cleaning products needed. if necessary. Wash the vehicle as soon as not form when you rinse it with water.

and buff off immediately after application. After replaced to restore corrosion protection. always take control can collect on the underbody. but expense. Rinse with clean water. A wax may then be applied. abrasive cleaners. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Do not Any stone chips. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels. use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. make sure the body repair shop Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or mild soap and water. avoid any painted surface of the wheel. chemicals. accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the the underbody parts such as fuel lines. brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. Don’t use strong soaps. abrasive polishes. If these are not care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all removed.Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels Sheet Metal Damage Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal chrome-plated wheels. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Tires Underbody Maintenance To clean your tires. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials avaliable from your dealer or other service Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash outlets. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust Notice: When applying a tire dressing. These in your dealer’s body and paint shop. frame. Petroleum-based products may damage the and exhaust system even though they have corrosion paint finish and tires. 5-93 . finish should be repaired right away. rinsing thoroughly. fractures or deep scratches in the use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. dry with a soft clean towel. repair or replacement. Finish Damage cleaners with acid. protection. floor pan vehicle.

do this for you. flush these materials from the GM Vehicle Care/Appearance underbody with plain water. smoke and finqerprints. at no charge to the owner.At least every spring. I Glass Cleaner Removes dirt. Polish stainless steel. the surfaces of Cleaner marks from whitewalls. GM will White Sidewall Tire Removes soil and black repair. blotchy. See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can the following products.000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase. 12 months or 12. GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Chemical Paint Spotting I Description I Usage I Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior chemical fallout. 5-94 . Vinyl Cleaner upholstery and whichever occurs first. Although no defect in the paint job causes this. Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect. ringlet-shaped Remover asphalt. I discolorations. I attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and Wax-Treated polishing cloth. road oil and can take two forms. Dirt packed in close areas of Materials the frame should be loosened before being flushed. new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within Cleans vinyl tops. grime. convertible tops. and small irregular dark spots etched into Chrome Cleaner and Use on chrome or the paint surface. This damage Tar and Road Oil Removes tar.

removes spots and stains Spot Lifter Removes swirl marks. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and protects in one easy step. Biodegradable and fingerprints. leather and Cleaner Wax carpet. Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes. eliminator used on Odor Eliminator Removes light scratches fabrics. Finish Enhancer contaminants. vinyl and fine scratches and other cloth upholstery. Cleans and Cleaner wire wheel covers. Swirl Remover Polish light surface Odorless spray odor contamination. from carpets. vinyl. Cleans. Spray on Quickly and easily wipe off. Gloss Lubricants on Raae 6-16. Removes dust. GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials GM Vehicle CarelAppearance Materials (cont’d) (cont’d) Description Usage Description Usage Removes dirt and grime Medium foaming Chrome and Wire Wheel from chrome wheels and shampoo. no wiping necessary. and protects finish. and surface phosphate free. shines and See your General Motors parts department for these Foaming Tire Shine Low products. 5-95 .

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.Vehicle Identification Service Parts Identification Label You’ll find this label located in the glove box. On this label is: your VIN. 5-96 . It’s very Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) helpful if you ever need to order parts. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel. specifications and replacement parts. on the driver’s side. the modeldesignation. Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. paint information and a list of all production options and special SAMPLE4UXI M072675 equipment.

circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. This greatly reduces the to add anything electrical to your vehicle. The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses. The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the band is broken or melted.Electrical System Power Windows and Other Power Options Add-on Electrical Equipment Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your power accessories. etc. the wiper will stop until the motor a spare fuse.and use its fuse.. that you can get along without . When the current load is too heavy. 5-97 . If the overload is caused by some electrical amperage. Some add-on electrical equipment can Fuses and Circuit Breakers keep other components from working as they should. the circuit breaker opens and closes. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. circuit breakers Your vehicle has an air bag system. Be sure you Windshield Wiper Fuses replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. see chance of fires caused by electrical problems. be sure to get it fixed.like the radio or cigarette lighter . Just pick some feature of your vehicle problem and not snow. you can borrow one that has the same cools. If the motor overheats due to If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have heavy snow.. Before attempting and fusible thermal links. Some electrical equipment candamage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-79. if it is the correct amperage. etc. Replace it as soon as you can. replace the fuse. protecting the vehicle unless you check with yourdealer first.

hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull Fuses I Usage 1 straight out.Instrument Panel Fuse Block The fuse block access door is on the driver’s side edge of the instrument panel. Seats Heated 5-98 . TBC ACCY ITruck Body Controller Accessorv I I I IGN 3 I Ignition. However. To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor. make sure it is of the correct amperage. RR Wiper Rear Window Wiper Switch You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse Special Equipment Option SEO ACCY Accessorv block access door. These can be used to replace a bad fuse. I CB LTDOORS I You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor which is mounted to the fuse block access door. Pull off th